R&S®ES-K1 Software Manual
Test and Measurement
Division
Manual
EMI Test Software for
R&S EMI Receivers and Accessory
ES-K1
1026.6790.02
Version 1.71
Printed in the Federal
Republic of Germany
1026.6819.42-08-
1
Before putting the product into operation for
the first time, make sure to read the following
Safety Instructions
Rohde & Schwarz makes every effort to keep the safety standard of its products up to date and to offer
its customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our products and the auxiliary equipment required
for them are designed and tested in accordance with the relevant safety standards. Compliance with
these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system. This product has been
designed and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s
plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe
operation, observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, Rohde & Schwarz will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is
designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or in the field and must not be used in
any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the product is used
for an intention other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's instructions. The
manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its operating manual and
within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the products requires technical skills and knowledge of English. It is therefore essential that the
products be used exclusively by skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the
required skills. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this will be
indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation.
Symbols and safety labels
Observe
operating
instructions
Weight
indication for
units >18 kg
Supply
voltage
ON/OFF
1171.0000.42-02.00
Danger of
electric
shock
Standby
indication
Direct
current
(DC)
Warning!
Hot
surface
PE terminal
Alternating
current (AC)
Ground
Direct/alternating
current (DC/AC)
Ground
terminal
Attention!
Electrostatic
sensitive
devices
Device fully
protected by
double/reinforced
insulation
Sheet 1
Safety Instructions
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before putting the product into operation. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety that appear in other parts of the documentation. In these safety
instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by Rohde & Schwarz,
including instruments, systems and all accessories.
Tags and their meaning
DANGER
This tag indicates a safety hazard with a high potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
WARNING
This tag indicates a safety hazard with a medium potential of risk for the
user that can result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
This tag indicates a safety hazard with a low potential of risk for the user
that can result in slight or minor injuries.
ATTENTION
This tag indicates the possibility of incorrect use that can cause damage
to the product.
NOTE
This tag indicates a situation where the user should pay special attention
to operating the product but which does not lead to damage.
These tags are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist. It is therefore
essential to make sure that the tags described here are always used only in connection with the
associated documentation and the associated product. The use of tags in connection with unassociated
products or unassociated documentation can result in misinterpretations and thus contribute to personal
injury or material damage.
Basic safety instructions
1. The product may be operated only under
the operating conditions and in the
positions specified by the manufacturer. Its
ventilation must not be obstructed during
operation. Unless otherwise specified, the
following requirements apply to
Rohde & Schwarz products:
prescribed operating position is always with
the housing floor facing down, IP protection
2X, pollution severity 2, overvoltage
category 2, use only in enclosed spaces,
max. operation altitude max. 2000 m.
Unless specified otherwise in the data
sheet, a tolerance of ±10% shall apply to
the nominal voltage and of ±5% to the
nominal frequency.
2. Applicable local or national safety
regulations and rules for the prevention of
accidents must be observed in all work
performed. The product may be opened
only by authorized, specially trained
personnel. Prior to performing any work on
the product or opening the product, the
1171.0000.42-02.00
product must be disconnected from the
supply network. Any adjustments,
replacements of parts, maintenance or
repair must be carried out only by technical
personnel authorized by Rohde & Schwarz.
Only original parts may be used for
replacing parts relevant to safety (e.g.
power switches, power transformers,
fuses). A safety test must always be
performed after parts relevant to safety
have been replaced (visual inspection, PE
conductor test, insulation resistance
measurement, leakage current
measurement, functional test).
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods,
the use of substances that induce an
allergic reaction (allergens, e.g. nickel)
such as aluminum cannot be generally
excluded. If you develop an allergic
reaction (such as a skin rash, frequent
sneezing, red eyes or respiratory
difficulties), consult a physician immediately
to determine the cause.
Sheet 2
Safety Instructions
4. If products/components are mechanically
and/or thermically processed in a manner
that goes beyond their intended use,
hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust
such as lead, beryllium, nickel) may be
released. For this reason, the product may
only be disassembled, e.g. for disposal
purposes, by specially trained personnel.
Improper disassembly may be hazardous to
your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
5. If handling the product yields hazardous
substances or fuels that must be disposed
of in a special way, e.g. coolants or engine
oils that must be replenished regularly, the
safety instructions of the manufacturer of
the hazardous substances or fuels and the
applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also
observe the relevant safety instructions in
the product documentation.
6. Depending on the function, certain products
such as RF radio equipment can produce
an elevated level of electromagnetic
radiation. Considering that unborn life
requires increased protection, pregnant
women should be protected by appropriate
measures. Persons with pacemakers may
also be endangered by electromagnetic
radiation. The employer is required to
assess workplaces where there is a special
risk of exposure to radiation and, if
necessary, take measures to avert the
danger.
7. Operating the products requires special
training and intense concentration. Make
certain that persons who use the products
are physically, mentally and emotionally fit
enough to handle operating the products;
otherwise injuries or material damage may
occur. It is the responsibility of the
employer to select suitable personnel for
operating the products.
8. Prior to switching on the product, it must be
ensured that the nominal voltage setting on
the product matches the nominal voltage of
the AC supply network. If a different voltage
is to be set, the power fuse of the product
may have to be changed accordingly.
9. In the case of products of safety class I with
movable power cord and connector,
operation is permitted only on sockets with
earthing contact and protective earth
connection.
1171.0000.42-02.00
10. Intentionally breaking the protective earth
connection either in the feed line or in the
product itself is not permitted. Doing so can
result in the danger of an electric shock
from the product. If extension cords or
connector strips are implemented, they
must be checked on a regular basis to
ensure that they are safe to use.
11. If the product has no power switch for
disconnection from the AC supply, the plug
of the connecting cable is regarded as the
disconnecting device. In such cases, it
must be ensured that the power plug is
easily reachable and accessible at all times
(length of connecting cable approx. 2 m).
Functional or electronic switches are not
suitable for providing disconnection from
the AC supply. If products without power
switches are integrated in racks or systems,
a disconnecting device must be provided at
the system level.
12. Never use the product if the power cable is
damaged. By taking appropriate safety
measures and carefully laying the power
cable, ensure that the cable cannot be
damaged and that no one can be hurt by
e.g. tripping over the cable or suffering an
electric shock.
13. The product may be operated only from
TN/TT supply networks fused with max.
16 A.
14. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are
dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all
the way into the socket. Otherwise this can
result in sparks, fire and/or injuries.
15. Do not overload any sockets, extension
cords or connector strips; doing so can
cause fire or electric shocks.
16. For measurements in circuits with voltages
Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g.
appropriate measuring equipment, fusing,
current limiting, electrical separation,
insulation) should be taken to avoid any
hazards.
17. Ensure that the connections with
information technology equipment comply
with IEC 950/EN 60950.
18. Never remove the cover or part of the
housing while you are operating the
product. This will expose circuits and
components and can lead to injuries, fire or
damage to the product.
Sheet 3
Safety Instructions
19. If a product is to be permanently installed,
the connection between the PE terminal on
site and the product's PE conductor must
be made first before any other connection
is made. The product may be installed and
connected only by a skilled electrician.
20. For permanently installed equipment
without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or
similar protective devices, the supply circuit
must be fused in such a way that suitable
protection is provided for users and
products.
21. Do not insert any objects into the openings
in the housing that are not designed for this
purpose. Never pour any liquids onto or into
the housing. This can cause short circuits
inside the product and/or electric shocks,
fire or injuries.
22. Use suitable overvoltage protection to
ensure that no overvoltage (such as that
caused by a thunderstorm) can reach the
product. Otherwise the operating personnel
will be endangered by electric shocks.
23. Rohde & Schwarz products are not
protected against penetration of water,
unless otherwise specified (see also safety
instruction 1.). If this is not taken into
account, there exists the danger of electric
shock or damage to the product, which can
also lead to personal injury.
24. Never use the product under conditions in
which condensation has formed or can form
in or on the product, e.g. if the product was
moved from a cold to a warm environment.
25. Do not close any slots or openings on the
product, since they are necessary for
ventilation and prevent the product from
overheating. Do not place the product on
soft surfaces such as sofas or rugs or
inside a closed housing, unless this is well
ventilated.
26. Do not place the product on heatgenerating devices such as radiators or fan
heaters. The temperature of the
environment must not exceed the maximum
temperature specified in the data sheet.
27. Batteries and storage batteries must not be
exposed to high temperatures or fire. Keep
batteries and storage batteries away from
children. If batteries or storage batteries are
improperly replaced, this can cause an
explosion (warning: lithium cells). Replace
the battery or storage battery only with the
1171.0000.42-02.00
matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
spare parts list). Batteries and storage
batteries are hazardous waste. Dispose of
them only in specially marked containers.
Observe local regulations regarding waste
disposal. Do not short-circuit batteries or
storage batteries.
28. Please be aware that in the event of a fire,
toxic substances (gases, liquids etc.) that
may be hazardous to your health may
escape from the product.
29. Please be aware of the weight of the
product. Be careful when moving it;
otherwise you may injure your back or other
parts of your body.
30. Do not place the product on surfaces,
vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons
of weight or stability are unsuitable for this
purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions when installing the
product and fastening it to objects or
structures (e.g. walls and shelves).
31. Handles on the products are designed
exclusively for personnel to hold or carry
the product. It is therefore not permissible
to use handles for fastening the product to
or on means of transport such as cranes,
fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is
responsible for securely fastening the
products to or on the means of transport
and for observing the safety regulations of
the manufacturer of the means of transport.
Noncompliance can result in personal injury
or material damage.
32. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the
sole responsibility of the driver to drive the
vehicle safely. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or
other damage in the event of an accident.
Never use the product in a moving vehicle if
doing so could distract the driver of the
vehicle. The driver is always responsible for
the safety of the vehicle; the manufacturer
assumes no responsibility for accidents or
collisions.
33. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is
integrated in a Rohde & Schwarz product,
do not use any other settings or functions
than those described in the documentation.
Otherwise this may be hazardous to your
health, since the laser beam can cause
irreversible damage to your eyes. Never try
to take such products apart, and never look
into the laser beam.
Sheet 4
Por favor lea imprescindiblemente antes de
la primera puesta en funcionamiento las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad
Informaciones de seguridad
Es el principio de Rohde & Schwarz de tener a sus productos siempre al día con los estandards de
seguridad y de ofrecer a sus clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros productos y todos los
equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de seguridad vigentes.
Nuestra sección de gestión de la seguridad de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. Este producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el comprobante de conformidad
adjunto según las normas de la CE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los
estandards técnicos de seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento
libre de peligros, deberá el usuario atenerse a todas las informaciones, informaciones de seguridad y
notas de alerta. Rohde&Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas
referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
solamente fue elaborado para ser utilizado en la indústria y el laboratorio o para fines de campo y de
ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona/cosa pueda ser dañada. El uso del
producto fuera de sus fines definidos o despreciando las informaciones de seguridad del fabricante
queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de
consecuencias a causa del maluso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado dentro de las
instrucciones del correspondiente manual del uso y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido (ver
hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso de los productos hace
necesarios conocimientos profundos y el conocimiento del idioma inglés. Por eso se deberá tener en
cuenta de exclusivamente autorizar para el uso de los productos a personas péritas o debidamente
minuciosamente instruidas con los conocimientos citados. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de
seguridad para el uso de productos de R&S, encontrará la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente.
Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad
Ver manual
de
instrucciones
del uso
Informaciones
para
maquinaria
con uns peso
de > 18kg
potencia EN
MARCHA/PARADA
1171.0000.42-02.00
Peligro de
golpe de
corriente
Indicación
Stand-by
¡Advertencia!
Superficie
caliente
Corriente
continua
DC
Conexión a
conductor
protector
Corriente
alterna AC
Conexión
a tierra
Corriente
continua/alterna
DC/AC
Conexión
a masa
conductora
¡Cuidado!
Elementos de
construción
con peligro de
carga
electroestática
El aparato está
protegido en su
totalidad por un
aislamiento de
doble refuerzo
página 1
Informaciones de seguridad
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para tratar de evitar daños y peligros de toda
clase. Es necesario de que se lean las siguientes informaciones de seguridad concienzudamente y se
tengan en cuenta debidamente antes de la puesta en funcionamiento del producto. También deberán
ser tenidas en cuenta las informaciones para la protección de personas que encontrarán en otro
capítulo de esta documentación y que también son obligatorias de seguir. En las informaciones de
seguridad actuales hemos juntado todos los objetos vendidos por Rohde&Schwarz bajo la
denominación de „producto“, entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así como toda clase de
accesorios.
Palabras de señal y su significado
PELIGRO
Indica un punto de peligro con gran potencial de riesgo para el
ususario.Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas.
ADVERTENCIA
Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo mediano para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta la muerte o graves
heridas .
ATENCIÓN
Indica un punto de peligro con un protencial de riesgo pequeño para el
usuario. Punto de peligro que puede llevar hasta heridas leves o
pequeñas
CUIDADO
Indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y a consecuencia
dañarlo.
INFORMACIÓN
Indica una situación en la que deberían seguirse las instrucciones en el
uso del producto, pero que no consecuentemente deben de llevar a un
daño del mismo.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el ámbito de la
comunidad económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición. Por eso se
debera tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en
combinación con la correspondiente documentación y solamente en combinación con el producto
correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en combinación con productos o
documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a malinterpretaciones y tener por
consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Informaciones de seguridad elementales
1. El producto solamente debe ser utilizado
según lo indicado por el fabricante referente
a la situación y posición de funcionamiento
sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se
convino de otra manera, es para los
productos R&S válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define
principialmente la posición con el suelo de la
caja para abajo , modo de protección IP 2X,
grado de suciedad 2, categoría de
sobrecarga eléctrica 2, utilizar solamente en
estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar.
A menos que se especifique otra cosa en la
hoja de datos, se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10% sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5%
sobre la frecuencia nominal.
1171.0000.42-02.00
2. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en
cuenta las normas locales de seguridad de
trabajo y de prevención de accidentes. El
producto solamente debe de ser abierto por
personal périto autorizado. Antes de efectuar
trabajos en el producto o abrirlo deberá este
ser desconectado de la corriente. El ajuste,
el cambio de partes, la manutención y la
reparación deberán ser solamente
efectuadas por electricistas autorizados por
R&S. Si se reponen partes con importancia
para los aspectos de seguridad (por ejemplo
el enchufe, los transformadores o los
fusibles), solamente podrán ser sustituidos
por partes originales. Despues de cada
recambio de partes elementales para la
seguridad deberá ser efectuado un control de
página 2
Informaciones de seguridad
seguridad (control a primera vista, control de
conductor protector, medición de resistencia
de aislamiento, medición de medición de la
corriente
conductora,
control
de
funcionamiento).
3. Como en todo producto de fabricación
industrial no puede ser excluido en general
de que se produzcan al usarlo elementos
que puedan generar alergias, los llamados
elementos alergénicos (por ejemplo el
níquel). Si se producieran en el trato con
productos R&S reacciones alérgicas, como
por ejemplo urticaria, estornudos frecuentes,
irritación de la conjuntiva o dificultades al
respirar, se deberá consultar inmediatamente
a un médico para averigurar los motivos de
estas reacciones.
4. Si productos / elementos de construcción son
tratados fuera del funcionamiento definido de
forma mecánica o térmica, pueden generarse
elementos peligrosos (polvos de sustancia
de metales pesados como por ejemplo
plomo, berilio, níquel). La partición elemental
del producto, como por ejemplo sucede en el
tratamiento de materias residuales, debe de
ser efectuada solamente por personal
especializado para estos tratamientos. La
partición elemental efectuada
inadecuadamente puede generar daños para
la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las
directivas nacionales referentes al
tratamiento de materias residuales.
5. En el caso de que se produjeran agentes de
peligro o combustibles en la aplicación del
producto que debieran de ser transferidos a
un tratamiento de materias residuales, como
por ejemplo agentes refrigerantes que deben
ser repuestos en periodos definidos, o
aceites para motores, deberan ser tenidas en
cuenta las prescripciones de seguridad del
fabricante de estos agentes de peligro o
combustibles y las regulaciones regionales
para el tratamiento de materias residuales.
Cuiden también de tener en cuenta en caso
dado las prescripciones de seguridad
especiales en la descripción del producto.
6. Ciertos productos, como por ejemplo las
instalaciones de radiación HF, pueden a
causa de su función natural, emitir una
radiación electromagnética aumentada. En
vista a la protección de la vida en desarrollo
deberían ser protegidas personas
embarazadas debidamente. También las
personas con un bypass pueden correr
1171.0000.42-02.00
peligro a causa de la radiación
electromagnética. El empresario está
comprometido a valorar y señalar areas de
trabajo en las que se corra un riesgo de
exposición a radiaciones aumentadas de
riesgo aumentado para evitar riesgos.
7. La utilización de los productos requiere
instrucciones especiales y una alta
concentración en el manejo. Debe de
ponerse por seguro de que las personas que
manejen los productos estén a la altura de
los requerimientos necesarios referente a
sus aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y
emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos.
El empresario lleva la responsabilidad de
seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el
manejo de los productos.
8. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto
se deberá tener por seguro de que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto equivalga a
la del la red de distribución. Si es necesario
cambiar la preselección de la tensión
también se deberán en caso dabo cambiar
los fusibles correspondientes del prodcuto.
9. Productos de la clase de seguridad I con
alimentación móvil y enchufe individual de
producto solamente deberán ser conectados
para el funcionamiento a tomas de corriente
de contacto de seguridad y con conductor
protector conectado.
10. Queda prohibida toda clase de interrupción
intencionada del conductor protector, tanto
en la toma de corriente como en el mismo
producto ya que puede tener como
consecuencia el peligro de golpe de corriente
por el producto. Si se utilizaran cables o
enchufes de extensión se deberá poner al
seguro, que es controlado su estado técnico
de seguridad.
11. Si el producto no está equipado con un
interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, se
deberá considerar el enchufe del cable de
distribución como interruptor. En estos casos
deberá asegurar de que el enchufe sea de
fácil acceso y nabejo (medida del cable de
distribución aproximadamente 2 m). Los
interruptores de función o electrónicos no
son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si
los productos sin interruptor están integrados
en construciones o instalaciones, se deberá
instalar el interruptor al nivel de la
instalación.
página 3
Informaciones de seguridad
12. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el
cable eléctrico. Asegure a través de las
medidas de protección y de instalación
adecuadas de que el cable de eléctrico no
pueda ser dañado o de que nadie pueda ser
dañado por él, por ejemplo al tropezar o por
un golpe de corriente.
20. En caso de que los productos que son
instalados fijamente en un lugar sean sin
protector implementado, autointerruptor o
similares objetos de protección, deberá la
toma de corriente estar protegida de manera
que los productos o los usuarios estén
suficientemente protegidos.
13. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento
en redes de distribución TN/TT aseguradas
con fusibles de como máximo 16 A.
21. Por favor, no introduzca ningún objeto que
no esté destinado a ello en los orificios de la
caja del aparato. No vierta nunca ninguna
clase de líquidos sobre o en la caja. Esto
puede producir corto circuitos en el producto
y/o puede causar golpes de corriente, fuego
o heridas.
14. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de
corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca
el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la
toma de corriente. Si no tiene en
consideración estas indicaciones se arriesga
a que se originen chispas, fuego y/o heridas.
15. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los
cables de extensión o los enchufes de
extensión ya que esto pudiera causar fuego
o golpes de corriente.
16. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente
con una tensión de entrada de Ueff > 30 V se
deberá tomar las precauciones debidas para
impedir cualquier peligro (por ejemplo
medios de medición adecuados, seguros,
limitación de tensión, corte protector,
aislamiento etc.).
17. En caso de conexión con aparatos de la
técnica informática se deberá tener en
cuenta que estos cumplan los requisitos de
la EC950/EN60950.
18. Nunca abra la tapa o parte de ella si el
producto está en funcionamiento. Esto pone
a descubierto los cables y componentes
eléctricos y puede causar heridas, fuego o
daños en el producto.
19. Si un producto es instalado fijamente en un
lugar, se deberá primero conectar el
conductor protector fijo con el conductor
protector del aparato antes de hacer
cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y la
conexión deberán ser efecutadas por un
electricista especializado.
1171.0000.42-02.00
22. Asegúrese con la protección adecuada de
que no pueda originarse en el producto una
sobrecarga por ejemplo a causa de una
tormenta. Si no se verá el personal que lo
utilice expuesto al peligro de un golpe de
corriente.
23. Los productos R&S no están protegidos
contra el agua si no es que exista otra
indicación, ver también punto 1. Si no se
tiene en cuenta esto se arriesga el peligro de
golpe de corriente o de daños en el producto
lo cual también puede llevar al peligro de
personas.
24. No utilice el producto bajo condiciones en las
que pueda producirse y se hayan producido
líquidos de condensación en o dentro del
producto como por ejemplo cuando se
desplaza el producto de un lugar frío a un
lugar caliente.
25. Por favor no cierre ninguna ranura u orificio
del producto, ya que estas son necesarias
para la ventilación e impiden que el producto
se caliente demasiado. No pongan el
producto encima de materiales blandos como
por ejemplo sofás o alfombras o dentro de
una caja cerrada, si esta no está
suficientemente ventilada.
26. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que
produzcan calor, como por ejemplo
radiadores o calentadores. La temperatura
ambiental no debe superar la temperatura
máxima especificada en la hoja de datos.
página 4
Informaciones de seguridad
27. Baterías y acumuladores no deben de ser
expuestos a temperaturas altas o al fuego.
Guardar baterías y acumuladores fuera del
alcance de los niños. Si las baterías o los
acumuladores no son cambiados con la
debida atención existirá peligro de explosión
(atención celulas de Litio). Cambiar las
baterías o los acumuladores solamente por
los del tipo R&S correspondiente (ver lista de
piezas de recambio). Baterías y
acumuladores son deshechos problemáticos.
Por favor tirenlos en los recipientes
especiales para este fín. Por favor tengan en
cuenta las prescripciones nacionales de cada
país referente al tratamiento de deshechos.
Nunca sometan las baterías o acumuladores
a un corto circuito.
28. Tengan en consideración de que en caso de
un incendio pueden escaparse gases tóxicos
del producto, que pueden causar daños a la
salud.
29. Por favor tengan en cuenta que en caso de
un incendio pueden desprenderse del
producto agentes venenosos (gases, líquidos
etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud.
30. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies,
vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus
características de peso o de estabilidad no
sean aptas para él. Siga siempre las
instrucciones de instalación del fabricante
cuando instale y asegure el producto en
objetos o estructuras (por ejemplo paredes y
estantes).
1171.0000.42-02.00
31. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven
solamente de ayuda para el manejo que
solamente está previsto para personas. Por
eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la
sujecion en o sobre medios de transporte
como por ejemplo grúas, carretillas
elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. El
usuario es responsable de que los productos
sean sujetados de forma segura a los medios
de transporte y de que las prescripciones de
seguridad del fabricante de los medios de
transporte sean tenidas en cuenta. En caso
de que no se tengan en cuenta pueden
causarse daños en personas y objetos.
32. Si llega a utilizar el producto dentro de un
vehículo, queda en la responsabilidad
absoluta del conductor que conducir el
vehículo de manera segura. Asegure el
producto dentro del vehículo debidamente
para evitar en caso de un accidente las
lesiones u otra clase de daños. No utilice
nunca el producto dentro de un vehículo en
movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al
conductor. Siempre queda en la
responsabilidad absoluta del conductor la
seguridad del vehículo y el fabricante no
asumirá ninguna clase de responsabilidad
por accidentes o colisiones.
33. Dado el caso de que esté integrado un
producto de laser en un producto R&S (por
ejemplo CD/DVD-ROM) no utilice otras
instalaciones o funciones que las descritas
en la documentación. De otra manera pondrá
en peligro su salud, ya que el rayo laser
puede dañar irreversiblemente sus ojos.
Nunca trate de descomponer estos
productos. Nunca mire dentro del rayo laser.
página 5
ES-K1
Content
In this manual
Index
I. Basic Package (ES-K1)
1. Introduction
1
2. Graphical User Interface
2
3. Standard Scripts
3
4. Standard Device Handler
4
5 . Dynami c Data E x c hange ( DDE)
5
II. Options
1. ES-K2
Script Development Kit
6
2. ES-K1x Device Handler:
Test Receiver and Spectrum Analyzers
7
3. ES-K3x Device Handler:
Accessory
8
4. ES-Kxx Special Device Handlers
9
1026.6819.42
3
E-8
ES-K1
Content
Content
1
Introduction..................................................................................................... 1-0
1.1
Overview.............................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.2.1
1.1.2.2
1.1.2.3
1.1.2.4
1.1.3
1.2
Introduction to the Manual.................................................................................................. 1-1
Short Description................................................................................................................ 1-2
Graphical User Interface .................................................................................................... 1-2
Operating Modes of the Software ...................................................................................... 1-2
Measuring and Analyzing Functions................................................................................... 1-3
Graphics and Report .......................................................................................................... 1-3
Licence ............................................................................................................................... 1-3
Installation........................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.1
System Requirements........................................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.2
Options Concept................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.2.1
Basic Program.................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2.2
Options ............................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2.3
Multiple-user Licences........................................................................................................ 1-5
1.2.3
Installation Instructions....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.3.1
Manuals on the CD-ROM ................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.3.2
ES-K1 on the Controller Function of the EMI Analyzer ESIB............................................. 1-6
1.2.3.3
Authentication..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.3.4
Option Disk......................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.3.5
Preparation for Installation ................................................................................................. 1-7
1.2.3.6
Starting the Installation....................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.3.7
Installation Options............................................................................................................. 1-8
1.2.3.7.1
Option Installation................................................................................................................. 1-9
1.2.3.7.2
Option Update..................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.3.7.3
Option „Demo Installation“ ................................................................................................ 1-14
1.2.3.7.4
De-installation of ES-K1 Software...................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.3.8
First Steps after Installation.............................................................................................. 1-15
1.3
Introduction to Operation ................................................................................................ 1-17
1.3.1
Measurement Task (Example)......................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.1.1
Test Setup ........................................................................................................................ 1-17
1.3.1.2
Block Diagram.................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.3.1.3
Definition of Terms ........................................................................................................... 1-18
1.3.2
Starting ES-K1 Software .................................................................................................. 1-19
1.3.3
Programming a Measurement with ES-K1 Software........................................................ 1-20
1.3.4
Preparatory Operations for Measurement........................................................................ 1-22
1.3.4.1
Performing the Measurement........................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.4.2
Editing Data in Scan Editor Window ................................................................................ 1-24
1.3.4.2.1
Adding a Receiver............................................................................................................... 1-24
1.3.4.2.2
Changing a Frequency Range.............................................................................................. 1-24
1.3.4.2.3
Deleting a Frequency Range ............................................................................................... 1-25
1.3.5
Measurement ................................................................................................................... 1-27
1.3.5.1
Example of Virtual Measurement..................................................................................... 1-27
1.3.5.2
Practical Measurements................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.5.2.1
Measurement of Broadband Interferer in Range 150 kHz to 30 MHz ................................ 1-29
1.3.5.2.2
Measurement of Broadband Interferer in Range 9 kHz to 30 MHz .................................... 1-30
2
2.1
Graphical User Interface ................................................................................ 2-0
Overview.............................................................................................................................. 2-1
1026.6819.42
5
E-8
Content
ES-K1
2.2
Files...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3
Filetypes .............................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.12
2.3.13
2.4
Script .................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Script Parameters .............................................................................................................. 2-6
Sequence ........................................................................................................................... 2-6
Measurement Result .......................................................................................................... 2-6
Limit Line............................................................................................................................ 2-6
Transducer and System Transducer.................................................................................. 2-6
Graphics Configuration ...................................................................................................... 2-7
Report Header.................................................................................................................... 2-7
Report Configuration .......................................................................................................... 2-7
Scan/Sweep Table ............................................................................................................. 2-7
Frequency List.................................................................................................................... 2-7
Test Configuration.............................................................................................................. 2-8
Text File.............................................................................................................................. 2-8
Editors ................................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2.4.9
2.5
Sequence Editor................................................................................................................. 2-9
Script Parameter Editor...................................................................................................... 2-9
Table Editor...................................................................................................................... 2-10
Graphics Configuration Editor .......................................................................................... 2-12
Report Header Editor ....................................................................................................... 2-16
Report Configuration Editor.............................................................................................. 2-16
Scan/Sweep Editor........................................................................................................... 2-17
Test Configuration Editor ................................................................................................. 2-18
Text Editor ........................................................................................................................ 2-19
Report ................................................................................................................................ 2-20
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.6
Print... ............................................................................................................................... 2-20
Printer Setup... ................................................................................................................. 2-21
Special Functions ............................................................................................................. 2-22
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.7
Configuration .................................................................................................................... 2-22
Quit (Alt-F4)..................................................................................................................... 2-22
Options Menu.................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8
2.8
Device Configuration........................................................................................................ 2-23
Selftest ............................................................................................................................. 2-24
Simulator .......................................................................................................................... 2-25
Login, User List and Change Password........................................................................... 2-26
Edit Accessory and Configure Accessory ........................................................................ 2-28
Main Toolbar, Device Toolbar and Status Bar ................................................................. 2-28
Background ...................................................................................................................... 2-29
Change Language............................................................................................................ 2-29
Measurement Functions .................................................................................................. 2-30
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
Interactive Device Dialog.................................................................................................. 2-30
Sequence ......................................................................................................................... 2-30
Script ................................................................................................................................ 2-30
Measurement Functions................................................................................................... 2-31
1026.6819.42
6
E-8
ES-K1
Content
2.8.4.1
2.8.4.2
2.9
Scan and Sweep Functions with Automatically Generated Graphics .............................. 2-31
Single Measurement ........................................................................................................ 2-33
Evaluation Functions ....................................................................................................... 2-37
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.9.6
2.9.7
2.9.8
2.9.9
2.9.10
2.9.11
2.9.12
2.9.13
2.9.14
2.9.15
Acceptance Analysis ........................................................................................................ 2-37
Peak Reduction................................................................................................................ 2-38
Subrange Maxima Reduction........................................................................................... 2-39
Subrange Minima Reduction............................................................................................ 2-40
Maxima Reduction ........................................................................................................... 2-41
Octave Maxima Reduction ............................................................................................... 2-41
Narrowband/Broadband Discrimination ........................................................................... 2-41
Conversion to ... / MHz..................................................................................................... 2-43
Unit Conversion................................................................................................................ 2-43
Merge Data....................................................................................................................... 2-44
Exclude Ambients ............................................................................................................ 2-44
Weighted Addition ............................................................................................................ 2-44
Reduce to Frequency List ................................................................................................ 2-45
GTEM Correlation ............................................................................................................ 2-45
S-LINE Correlation ........................................................................................................... 2-48
3
Standard Scripts ............................................................................................. 3-0
3.1
Cable Calibration ................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
Description ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
List of the Script Parameters.............................................................................................. 3-8
Probe Calibration.............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-13
Site Attenuation ................................................................................................................ 3-18
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-18
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-21
Overview Test ................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.5
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-28
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-29
Semi Interactive Test........................................................................................................ 3-35
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.6
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-35
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-36
Power Test ........................................................................................................................ 3-42
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.7
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-42
Parameter Sets ................................................................................................................ 3-42
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-43
Voltage Mains Test ........................................................................................................... 3-52
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-52
Parameter Sets ................................................................................................................ 3-52
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-53
Voltage Terminal Test ...................................................................................................... 3-63
3.8.1
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-63
1026.6819.42
7
E-8
Content
ES-K1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.9
Parameter Sets ................................................................................................................ 3-63
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-64
Azimuth Chart Test........................................................................................................... 3-70
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.10
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-70
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-71
Field Strength Test ........................................................................................................... 3-76
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.11
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-76
Parameter Sets ................................................................................................................ 3-77
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-78
Field Strength Test (fast) ................................................................................................. 3-91
3.11.1
3.11.2
3.11.3
3.12
Description ....................................................................................................................... 3-91
Parameter Sets ................................................................................................................ 3-91
List of the Script Parameters............................................................................................ 3-92
Magnetic Field Strength Test ........................................................................................ 3-102
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3
3.13
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-102
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-102
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-103
GTEM Test....................................................................................................................... 3-112
3.13.1
3.13.2
3.13.3
3.14
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-112
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-112
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-113
S-LINE Test...................................................................................................................... 3-121
3.14.1
3.14.2
3.14.3
3.15
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-121
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-121
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-122
Automotive Test.............................................................................................................. 3-129
3.15.1
3.15.2
3.15.3
3.16
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-129
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-129
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-130
EMI STD Test................................................................................................................... 3-137
3.16.1
3.16.2
3.16.3
3.17
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-137
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-137
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-138
MIL STD 461/462 C Test ................................................................................................. 3-144
3.17.1
3.17.2
3.17.3
3.18
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-144
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-144
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-145
MIL STD D Limits ............................................................................................................ 3-151
3.18.1
3.18.2
3.19
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-151
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-152
GAM Test ......................................................................................................................... 3-153
3.19.1
3.19.2
3.19.3
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-153
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-153
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-154
1026.6819.42
8
E-8
ES-K1
3.20
RF Exposure Test ........................................................................................................... 3-160
3.20.1
3.20.2
3.20.3
4
Content
Description ..................................................................................................................... 3-160
Parameter Sets .............................................................................................................. 3-161
List of the Script Parameters.......................................................................................... 3-162
Standard Device Drivers ................................................................................ 4-0
4.1
V Networks ESH2-Z5 / ENV 4200 and ES-H3-Z5 / ENV 216 ............................................. 4-1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.2
Interactive Mode................................................................................................................. 4-1
Script Mode ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
IEEE Bus Commands ........................................................................................................ 4-1
Triple Loop Antenna HM020 .............................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
Interactive Mode................................................................................................................. 4-3
Script Mode ........................................................................................................................ 4-3
IEEE Bus Commands ........................................................................................................ 4-3
Relay Matrix RSU/PSU........................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.4
Concept .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
Setup of the RSU Drivers................................................................................................... 4-4
Setup of the SUPER-RSU Driver ....................................................................................... 4-5
Script Mode ........................................................................................................................ 4-5
Driver LPT I/O...................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.5
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4-6
Hardware............................................................................................................................ 4-6
Properties ........................................................................................................................... 4-6
Dialog mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-6
Script Commands............................................................................................................... 4-8
Relay Matrix TS-RSP .......................................................................................................... 4-9
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
Device ................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Properties ........................................................................................................................... 4-9
Operating Dialog .............................................................................................................. 4-10
Overview of the Script Commands................................................................................... 4-11
5
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) ..................................................................... 5-0
5.1
General ................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1
5.2
DDE Commands ................................................................................................................ 5-1
DDE with MS WORD for Windows™................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.3
General Command Syntax with WORD for Windows™ .................................................... 5-1
Creating a Test Report....................................................................................................... 5-2
DDE Commands of the Application ES-K1 ...................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.1.3
5.3.1.4
5.3.1.5
5.3.1.6
ES-K1 DDE Topics............................................................................................................. 5-6
General State of the System .............................................................................................. 5-6
Lists .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
Graphics Configuration ...................................................................................................... 5-8
Report Header.................................................................................................................... 5-9
Report Configuration ........................................................................................................ 5-10
Scan/Sweep Table ........................................................................................................... 5-11
1026.6819.42
9
E-8
1 Introduction
1026.6819.42
1-0
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Introduction to the Manual
The following chapters provide a complete description of the EMI Application Software ES-K1. Users
working with the EMI Apllication Software ES-K1 for the first time are recommended to read through
chapters 1 to 4 one after the other.
Chapter 1
"Introduction", provides a general overview.
Chapter 2
"Graphical User Interface“, describes the elements of the graphical user interface.
Chapter 3
"Standard Script Description", provides information on the enclosed standard scripts.
Chapter 4
"Standard Device Drivers", describes the function of the Rohde & Schwarz V-networks,
relay switching units, etc..
The Options ES-Kxx provide information about the use of the script language FSL (Flexible Script
Language) and the device drivers.
Option ES-K2,
"Script Development Kit", explains how a script is produced and includes a
description of the general language elements of FSL and a list of all standard
functions, system-specific and device-specific functions.
Option ES-K1x,
"Device Driver", contains a list of all device drivers for test receivers and spectrum
analyzers including their application, which are supported by the EMI Application
Software ES-K1.
Option ES-K3x,
"Device Driver", contains a list of all device drivers for accessories including their
application, which are supported by the EMI Application Software ES-K1.
Option ES-K50,
"Device Driver", contains the universal IEEE-bus device driver for simple ASCII
communication with devices that can be controlled via IEEE bus.
Option ES-K80,
"Device driver", contains the device driver for the R&S TTL card PS-B11.
1026.6819.42
1-1
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.1.2 Short Description
The Rohde&Schwarz EMI Software package ES-K1 is an up-to-date and user-friendly software which
can be ideally used for all EMI measurements of conducted and radiated interference.
The number of measurements required to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMV) is continuously
increasing, along with the demand for reliability, reproducibility and economic efficiency of these
measurements.
Features of the EMI Application Software ES-K1:
Ÿ
Ÿ
User-friendly software for Microsoft Windows
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Possible adaptation to other standards
TM
95 / 98 / 98SE / ME / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP
EMI measurements both to international commercial standards (CISPR, VDE, FCC, VCCI,
ANSI, EN) and military standards (MIL, VG, DEF-STAN, GAM-EG13)
Automatic and interactive mode
Transmission factors and limit lines are automatically considered in the calculation of the results
Evaluation of narrowband and broadband interference
Calibration of the test setup
Comfortable and flexible documentation of measurement results
Various ways of data export
Future extensions can be easily implemented due to the option concept
1.1.2.1 Graphical User Interface
The EMI Application Software ES-K1 for WINDOWSTM is equipped with a graphical user interface,
which permits to start with the program immediately and can be readily operated by the user.
1.1.2.2 Operating Modes of the Software
The measurement procedures can be executed either in interactive mode or automatically, depending
on the application of the software.
a) Interactive mode
In interactive mode, each device can be controlled individually by means of its own window. All other
functions such as measuring and analyzing functions can also be operated interactively.
b) Automatic mode
The automatic measurement runs are implemented by scripts of a macro language, thus releasing the
user from routine tasks. The scripts control the measurement run, evaluate the measurement results
and produce the necessary reports for documentation of the measurement results.
An option for the system software is the Script Development Environment (ES-K2). This environment
permits the user to modify the supplied standard scripts in order to match them to the latest standards. It
also allows him to develop scripts that cover completely new standards. Of course, this environment
also contains debugging aids and test facilities, which simplify the generation and modification of the
scripts.
1026.6819.42
1-2
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.1.2.3 Measuring and Analyzing Functions
The Software ES-K1 supports a number of measuring and analyzing functions. This is necessary to
minimize the number of measurements to be performed again, which are very time-consuming.
Possible measurements are the scan, the execution of a fast overview measurement (sweep) and the
measurement performed at discrete frequencies.
The most important ways of evaluation (data reduction) are the acceptance analysis, peak reduction,
subrange maxima and subrange minima reduction, maxima reduction and narrowband/broadband
discrimination.
Further possible evaluations are used to combine measurement results, output MIL measurement
results in a broadband-related display (/MHz) and eliminate known interference, e.g. ambients.
A very particular type of data handling is the GTEM correlation, which permits to convert measurement
results to open-area conditions using the GTEM cell.
A similar correlation for S-LINE measurement cells is also available.
1.1.2.4 Graphics and Report
Measurement results, limit lines and transducer factors can be displayed in a manifold and flexible way
as table or graphics. Up to eight different traces can be shown in a window with linear or logarithmic
frequency axis. The shape, line style and colour of the graphical elements can be optimally adapted to
the requirements of the documentation.
For interactive, graphical evaluation of the measurement results, a marker and a delta marker are
available, which can be easily positioned using the mouse. The zoom function permits to enlarge any
section of the measurement. The measurement results can be displayed simultaneously in various
windows.
The measurement results are summed up in a report which is configured by the user himself. In addition
to a report header, all data relevant to the measurement can be output, e.g. scan and sweep table. The
output of the measurement results, limit lines and transducers is possible both in tabular and graphical
form.
1.1.3 Licence
The EMI Application Software ES-K1 is protected by a hardware adapter (hardlock), which is connected
to the parallel interface of the computer. This does not impair the function of the interface, i.e. the
adapter is transparent for the user.
Note:
The user must make sure that the hardlock is firmly connected!
1026.6819.42
1-3
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.2 Installation
1.2.1 System Requirements
EMI Application Software ES-K1 can be used with any computer fulfilling the following system
requirements:
• Microsoft Windows
TM
95 / 98 / 98SE / ME / NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP
• CPU: 486; PENTIUM recommended
• 16 Mbyte RAM; 64 Mbytes recommended
• At least 60 Mbytes free memory on the harddisk
• SVGA graphics adapter (800x600 pixels); XVGA (1024x768 pixels) recommended
• GPIB interface compatible with National Instruments GPIB interface with Windows device driver
(PCII/IIA, AT-GPIB , AT-GPIB/TNT, PCI-GPIB, PCMCIA-GPIB)
EMI Software ES-K1 fitted with the associated drivers for GPIB interface can be used with the operating
systems listed above.
The installation software automatically considers the conditions depending on the operating system.
Note:
All path indications generated in the ES-K1 have to comply with DOS conventions, i.e.
meet the rule <8 characters>.<3 extension> .
1.2.2 Options Concept
Due to its options concept the software is easy to handle and future-safe. The drivers required for the
units and additional software options are combined to form the software core.
EMI Software ES-K1 supports all EMI test receivers and spectrum analyzers from Rohde & Schwarz, ie
the models of receiver family ESCS, ESHS, ESVS, ESVD, ESPC und ESS, the EMI test receivers
based on spectrum analyzers ESPI, ESIB, ESAI, ESBI und ESMI and still the instruments ESH3, ESVP
and EZM.
In addition to these receivers, a large number of remote-controllable accessories is used. These are
amongst others artificial-mains networks and V-networks ESH2-Z5, ENV4200, ESH3-Z5 and ENV216,
Absorbing Clamp Slideways for the measurement of conducting interference as well as remotecontrollable Positioning Mast and Turntable for measuring RFI fieldstrength. Relay matrices are used for
switching the antenna and transducers.
1026.6819.42
1-4
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.2.2.1 Basic Program
EMI Software ES-K1 comprise the following components:
TM
• EMI software core under Windows contains the graphics user interface, standard scripts for
automated test sequences and other standard data (limit values, etc.)
• Drivers for R&S artificial-mains networks ESH2-Z5, ENV4200, ESH3-Z5 and ENV216 as well as for
R&S relay switch units (PSU, RSU,PSN, TS-RSP).
• Internal database for data management (scripts, limit-value lines, transducers, graphics, scan tables,
test results, etc.)
The data of ES-K1 internal database can be exported for transfer and filing operations, new data can be
imported.
The internal database can be configured with the supplied standard data during the installation.
1.2.2.2 Options
The following options (receiver and accessories) can be used with ES-K1:
ES-K2
Script development environment
ES-K10
ES-K11
ES-K12
ES-K13
ES-K14
ES-K15
ES-K16
ES-K17
ES-K18
ES-K19
ES-K20
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESCS / ESPC / ESHS / ESVS / ESVD
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESS
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESAI / ESBI / ESMI
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESH3 / ESVP
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESH3-EZM / ESVP-EZM
Driver for R&S spectrum analyzers FSA / FSB / FSM
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESIB and spectrum analyzers FSE (FSIQ)
Driver for R&S tempest receivers FSET
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESPI
Driver for R&S spectrum analyzers FSP and FSU
Driver for R&S EMI test receivers ESCI
ES-K30
ES-K31
ES-K32
Driver for Schäfer Mast HCM (RSM) and Turntable HCT (RST)
Driver for Schäfer Absorbing Clamp Slidebar HCA (RSA)
Driver for EMCO Mast with Controller 1050 and EMCO Turntable with Controller 1060, as
well as for combined Controllers 1090 and 2090
Driver for DEISEL Mast and Turntable with Controller HD50/100
Driver for DEISEL Absorbing Clamp Slidebar with Controller HD50/100
Driver for AKZO Mast and Turntable with Controller ASC-300
Driver for EMCO Mast and Turntable with Controller 2090, and for SUNOL Mast and
Turntable with Controller SC9xV
ES-K33
ES-K34
ES-K37
ES-K40
ES-K50
Universal GPIB driver
1.2.2.3 Multiple-user Licences
ES-K100
Licence for the use of EMI Application Software by several users. An additional hardlock
will be supplied for each ES-K100 ordered.
1.2.3 Installation Instructions
Scope of supply of EMI Software ES-K1:
• CD-ROM for installing the software
1026.6819.42
1-5
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
• Hardlock key (dongle) for authentication (not with an update)
• Option disk with customer-specific authentication code (not with an update)
• Operating manual (not with an update)
The EMI Software ES-K1 is installed on the PC from the the CD-ROM.
If necessary then a set of installation disks can be generated from the CD-ROM through starting the
batch file 'DISKS.BAT'. Eight formatted disks will be needed then.
1.2.3.1 Manuals on the CD-ROM
On the CD-ROM there's a subdirectory 'Manuals' which holds PDF files that represent the manuals.
Those files can be viewed and printed with the "Acrobat Reader" from Adobe Systems Inc. It also
enables to perform full text searches.
The "Acrobat Reader" is an application which is available free of charge (freeware) and also included on
the CD-ROM. If that application is already installed on the PC then PDF files can be viewed without
further action. In the Internet there are many documents stored as PDF files. The latest version of the
"Acrobat Reader" can also be downloaded from the Internet (http://www.adobe.com).
To install the "Acrobat Reader" (version 4.0) from the CD-ROM on your computer proceed as follows
(drive D: refers to the CD-ROM drive):
Go to the "Start" button and select "Run".
Enter ' D:\AcroRd32\setup ' and follow the instructions of the installation program.
1.2.3.2 ES-K1 on the Controller Function of the EMI Analyzer ESIB
If the application ES-K1 shall be installed on the controller function (Windows NT) of the EMI analyzer
ESIB then the following topics have to be considered:
The built-in LCD display has a resolution of 640x480 pixels (VGA), but the application requires a
resolution of minimum 800x600 pixels (SVGA). Therefore the application can only be operated with an
external monitor for which a higher resolution can be selected. To do so the softkey "Ext. Monitor" in the
general setup of the instrument firmware has to be activated and then on the PC side (Windows NT) the
property settings of the 'Display' ('Control Panel') have to be modified. Further details can be found in
the ESIB manual (chapter 1.7: Connecting an External Monitor).
For the installation of the application under Windows NT you need administrator access privileges
because also the hardlock driver (a system driver) needs to be installed. You have to do a login with the
'administrator' identification. Further details can be found in the ESIB manual (chapter 1.4: Controller
Function). Once the application has been successfully installed you can change back to the original
login with 'instrument' identification.
If the application doesn't need to control any other GPIB devices besides the ESIB then a second GPIB
interface is not necessary and can be replaced by the internal software interface "RSIB". Further details
can be found in the ES-K16 manual (Operation with the RSIB Interface)
1.2.3.3 Authentication
When using ES-K1 software, the hardlock key (dongle) is required for authentication if a test receiver
and/or accessories are to be controlled via the GPIB interface. If the software is operated without a
suitable hardlock, it runs in the im Demo mode, i.e. the GPIB interface cannot be physically addressed,
the units can only be operated virtually. The other functions can all be used without any restriction.
The hardlock is not required during installation but on starting the ES-K1.
1026.6819.42
1-6
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.2.3.4 Option Disk
This disk which is supplied in addition to the installation disk and queried by the software during
installation contains the ID files (ID: identification) coded to the associated hardlock key according to the
specific customer's requirements. The files allow the use of ES-K1 with the user's test receivers or
options (accessories). The options are offered by the setup program for installation.
If no option disk is available then only an update can be done which in turn requires the existence of an
earlier installation or version of the application.
If an installation of version 1.50 exists then an option disk can b egenerated from there through starting
the batch file 'OPT-DISK.BAT' in the referring subdirectory '...\EXECUTE\'.
1.2.3.5 Preparation for Installation
Prior to installation, check the GPIB configuration for correct settings (using the configuration program
supplied with the GPIB card):
DMA Channel:
Base I/O Address:
Interrupt Line:
Enable Auto Serial Polling:
Assert REN when System Controller
NONE, driver setting and interface setting should match
driver setting and interface setting should match
driver setting and interface setting should match; may alsobe
set to NONE
NO
YES
All settings can be performed indepedent of the operating system using the associated configuration
programs. The configuration can to be set in the 'Control Panel' under 'System' using the 'Device
Manager', under Windows NT 4.0 in the 'Control Panel'.
If the software is operated on a computer without GPIB driver, the ES-K1 displays the error message
("Data error - Data GPIB.DLL not found."). This message can be ignored, the software runs in the demo
mode in this case.
1.2.3.6 Starting the Installation
The EMI Application Software ES-K1 has to be installed under Windows. To do this, the first installation
disk is to be inserted in the corresponding drive.
The installation is performed via the taskbar under Windows 95 / 98 / NT4.0 (for Windows NT4.0 / 2000
/ XP administrator access privileges are required for the installation!):
1. Open the Start menu. Select the menu item settings and system control to open the associated
window.
2. The dialog is opened by clicking the icon Software and the setup.exe program is automatically
selected from the disk by clicking the Installation key.
Note:
The installation language is in English. Prior to starting the setup program terminate all
other Windows applications.
When re-installing EMI Software ES-K1 all presettings offered in the queries and dialogs of the
installation program can be accepted with Next or Continue.
1026.6819.42
1-7
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.2.3.7 Installation Options
After starting the setup program the following is displayed on the screen:
The option Update is used for former versions of the EMI software, which is installed in the system.
The option Demo Installation performs an installation of the ES-K1 specifically for demos.
1026.6819.42
1-8
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.2.3.7.1 Option Installation
This option allows the installation of EMI Software ES-K1, the supplied drivers and options (by querying
the option disk) and the pre-configured database.
This dialog field selects the directory, in which EMI Software ES-K1 is to be installed. Use the Browse..
key to change the directory or to enter a new directory.
Note:
The path name under which the ES-K1 software is to be installed should not exceed a
length of 30 characters.
The setup program then queries the customer-specific option disk:
After inserting the option disk in the cooresponding drive, the setup program offers the drivers and
options for EMI Software ES-K1 via the supplied ID files. All supplied components are usually installed,
confirmation with the Next key is sufficient.
If only specific options are to be installed, selection is via Change.. key from selected components
Program Files, EMI Test Receivers and Acessory Drivers:
1026.6819.42
1-9
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
After selecting the corresponding components and clicking the Change... key, another dialog field
allows the specific selection of options by a click:
After selecting the components and options to be installed, the installation of the pre-configured
database for EMI Software ES-K1 is offered.
The option Install Standard Database installs the pre-configured database with the standard data
(scripts, limit-value lines, scan data, transducers, etc.). The option Create New Database is used when
an existing external database is to be imported after the installation.
1026.6819.42
1-10
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
If an ES-K1 database is detected, either the existing database is saved in a backup directory before
creating the new database or this step is skipped by selecting the option No Database Installation.
EMI Software ES-K1, the associated Readme files of the installed components and options as well as
the Help files are combined in a program group, which can be selected via the next dialog:
Program group EMI is offered as a default setting:
Before the installation is performed by transferring the files from the installation disks, the setup program
again indicates the selected installation options, the selected components and options, the program path
and the program group for verification:
1026.6819.42
1-11
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
The current state of the file transfer to the harddisk is displayed during the subsequent installation
through a progress bar.
At the end of the installation, a re-start of Windows or of the computer (depending on the operating
system) is offered to activate the newly installed driver of the hardlock required to operate the ES-K1:
1026.6819.42
1-12
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
The ES-K1 program can be started in the selected program group by clicking the R&S icon after
termination of the setup program:
The ES-K1 Readme File contains general and additional current information on EMI Software ES-K1,
which must be taken into account before using the ES-K1 software.
Directory structure of EMI Software ES-K1:
The database of EMI Software ES-K1 is installed in the 'DATA' directory or in
the directories below. All relevant data such as limit lines, transducers, scan
and sweep data, test results, scripts, etc. are stored here.
The directory 'DOC' contains README files for the installed options and more.
The executable program components (binaries, DLLs etc.) are located in the
directory 'EXECUTE' and the referring subdirectories 'DEVICES' and 'ES-K1'.
The supplied databases which are pre-installed by the setup program is
available through a number of directories:
The directory 'I02' holds script examples from the manual for the "script
development kit" ES-K2.
The receiver-specific scan and sweep tables can be imported from
subdirectories of 'Ixx' (refers to receiver option ES-Kxx).
The 'Standard Data' (limit lines, standard scripts, etc.) are located in
subdirectories of 'IMPSTD'.
The meaning of the subdirectories inside (topics) is explained in the
Readme file.
The 'OPTIONS' directory contains the customer-specific authentication files for
the hardlock.
The background pictures for the ES-K1 software are stored in the 'WMF'
directory.
1026.6819.42
1-13
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.2.3.7.2 Option Update
The installation of the option Update serves for the automatic transfer of customer-specific hardlock key
files of an existing former EMI software installation. This option does not require a specific option disk
since a check for the presence of an ES-K1 software is performed at the beginning of the installation.
If such a version is detected, the drivers and options offered for the installation result from the existing
ID files.
Note:
The installation of the new version of EMI Software ES-K1 should always be carried out in
its own directory (without overwriting of an existing version).
Existing data sets can be exported from the old version and imported into the new version of ES-K1.
1.2.3.7.3 Option „Demo Installation“
No customer-specific option disk is required for the installation of the demo mode, all drivers and options
can be selected. This installation of EMI Software ES-K1 is provided for trying out the software in the
demo mode (without active operation via the GPIB interface) or for full operation of ES-K1 with demo
hardlock code 0001.
1.2.3.7.4 De-installation of ES-K1 Software
To de-install EMI Software ES-K1, double-click the Un-Install ES-K1 icon. The de-installation software
clears all subdirectories generated under the installation directory and files, except the database files
created by the user after the installation as well as the file ES-K1.INI in the subdirectory ..\EXECUTE\.
The above-mentioned files or the paths created after the installation are to be manually cleared, as
required.
1026.6819.42
1-14
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.2.3.8 First Steps after Installation
EMI Software ES-K1 has a password protection for each user, which offers the following advantages:
• The data are protected against unauthorized access
• The configuration of the system can be only changed by authorized persons
In addition, each user of ES-K1 is allocated to a user group. The user groups can be allocated to the
three user classes with different access rights:
• System manager
• Extended
• Standard
User groups or user names are not provided on delivery of the software. Therefore, log-in dialog is not
called when the ES-K1 software is started for the first time, but the user group dialog:
After setting up the user group with the ADD key, the list of users to belong to the defiend group is
entered in the subsequent dialog:
1026.6819.42
1-15
E-8
Introduction
Note:
ES-K1
At least one system manager should be defined since it is only the system manager who
can enter further users in the list of users.
When a user logs in for the first time, the entry and confirmation of the password is required:
After these steps, the installation and the setup of EMI Software ES-K1 is terminated for the user. The
next chapter gives an introduction on how to perform measurements.
Annotation:
When the application window is minimized under Windows NT 4.0, then the window cannot be restored
with the left mouse button, but with the right mouse button instead.
Important Note:
The databases generated by the application are not designed for multi user access, i.e. only one user
may access such a database at a time.
1026.6819.42
1-16
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.3 Introduction to Operation
In the example below, interactive control of the software is explained step by step to familiarize the user
with the logical sequence of operations.
The example is based on a specific measurement task that can be performed immediately with the
equipment shown. For practising, the measurement can also be performed without the said equipment
in the virtual operating mode. This mode is automatically selected if there is no hardlock at the printer
output of the computer. In this case, the "Test Setup" and "Block Diagram" sections are irrelevant, and
the values entered into the test report are simulated values supplied by an internal random generator.
1.3.1 Measurement Task (Example)
Measurement of EMI voltage on the power line of a domestic appliance with 200 W power
consumption; continuous interference, pure broadband interference, ie without internal processor or the
like.
Test setup to CISPR 16-2, Figure 2.
Limit values to EN 55014
1.3.1.1 Test Setup
> 200
groundplane
DUT
test receiver
LISN
40
30..40
80
wooden
table
>80
u-cond-3
FIG 1: Test setup to CISPR 16-2
1026.6819.42
1-17
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.3.1.2 Block Diagram
EUT
power supply
RFI
LP filter
mains
RFI
RFI
EMI test receiver
HP filter
LISN
line selection
TTL
GPIB
PC with ES-K1
FIG 2: Block diagram of EMI test setup
1.3.1.3 Definition of Terms
Some terms necessary for understanding ES-K1 operation are explained below.
Transducers are four-terminal networks connected between the input of the test setup and the test
receiver, for example a test antenna in EMI field strength measurements. The antenna converts in a
defined manner the EMI field strength level (given in dB(µV/m) for electrical field strength) into a voltage
level (measured in dB(µV)), which is displayed by the test receiver. The difference between the two
numerical values is referred to as transducer factor (unit: dB(1/m)), which is usually frequencydependent. Stored transducer data, therefore, always include the transducer factor and the conversion
into the correct unit so that the result displayed has the correct magnitude and unit.
Standards, which are listed in the ES-K1 database, contain information on emission limit values, the
frequency range to which a given standard applies and on the setup of the test receiver. All of the
standards in question cover product families. For example, the EN55014 standard applies to "Electrical
equipment and systems" covering, among other equipment, all domestic appliances and electric tools.
Scanning is the tuning of the test receiver step by step across a given frequency range. For this, the
step size (absolute or as percentage of the tuning frequency), the dwell time for each frequency, and the
start and stop frequencies are to be defined. Synthesized test receivers (eg ESxS, ESS, ESPC) are
typically tuned by scanning.
Sweeping is the continuous tuning of a test receiver across a given frequency range. In addition to start
and stop frequencies, the time for the receiver to sweep the frequency range is to be defined. This
tuning mode is typically employed by spectrum analyzers, although some analyzers can be tuned step
by step as well (eg ESMI). Series ESxS and ESS test receivers have no sweep capability. No sweep
tables are therefore supplied for these units.
1026.6819.42
1-18
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.3.2 Starting ES-K1 Software
Activate ES-K1 icon
in Windows Program
Manager field.
FIG 3: ES-K1
software icon
NOTE:
When program has been loaded,
enter user name and password (log-in):
FIG 4: Log-in dialog window
The user name and password must be entered in exactly the same notation (upper-case
and lower-case letters) as in program installation. Even the slightest difference will result in
abortion of the program. It is therefore advisable to note down the user name and password
before entering them during program installation.
Confirm user name with TAB key (not with
RETURN!), and password with OK or RETURN.
The response message depends on whether or not
a hardlock is installed at the printer output. For
practising, the program can be run without
hardlock. In this case, the window (FIG 5) shown
opposite will appear:
FIG 5
On confirmation with OK, the default background mask of ES-K1 Software (FIG 6) appears, from which
operation of the program can be started.
FIG 6:
Background mask for Software ES-K1
1026.6819.42
1-19
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.3.3 Programming a Measurement with ES-K1 Software
As an initial step, configuration of the test equipment as shown in the test setup (FIG 2) is to be defined.
For this, select Device Configuration... from the Options menu.
FIG 7
Device configuration dialog window
Instruments addressed by ES-K1 can be loaded into the Device field.
On clicking on
, available devices appear after approx. 10 s in the Device field from where they
can be selected by means of the scrollbar. In this example, Test Receiver ESHS is selected. Then the
Interface (Õ GBIB0), Address (Õ17) and Mode are to be set. The virtual or physical mode is selected
automatically depending on whether a hardlock is installed or the measurement is performed with real
devices, see 1.3). Devices can be switched passive (Active not selected). This prevents measurement
errors in the case of devices listed but not connected.
Entries in the Name field are optional. They describe a device more precisely if several devices of the
same type are used. Entries in the Description field are optional, too.
On clicking on
, ESHS is transferred as the first device to position <End of table>, which thus
moves one line down, ie <End of table> is always indicated at the end of the list.
Next, Two-Line V-Network ESH3-Z5 is to be selected in the Device field. ESH3-Z5 has no GPIB
interface but is driven via the parallel TTL interface of the test receiver (see FIG 2), so the GPIB address
of the test receiver is to be entered, ie the default address 20 is to be changed to 17. Then Two-Line
V-Network ESH3-Z5 is to be transferred to the device table by clicking on Insert. FIG 8 shows the
complete device configuration. Any entries made in the Name and Description fields are displayed in
the corresponding columns of the device table.
Make sure to confirm the settings made in the Device Configuration window with
, otherwise
the settings will be lost. Note: if there is no response on clicking on OK, click on Modify even if no
modifications were made, then OK will be active in any case.
1026.6819.42
1-20
E-8
ES-K1
FIG 8:
Introduction
Completed device configuration. Return to main menu with
1026.6819.42
1-21
.
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.3.4 Preparatory Operations for Measurement
The shortest way of parameterizing the devices used is by calling the data stored in the database of the
software, ie tuning mode of test receiver (scan or sweep), transducer characteristics (eg of artificial
mains networks) and limit values stipulated by standards. The ES-K1 database is managed by the
Navigator, which is called from the File menu (FIG 10).
For initial use of the ES-K1 software, information first has to be loaded into the database and is then
available for any subsequent measurements.
Software handling is therefore different after initial installation and subsequent operations.
After installation, the Scan Table for the receiver used must be loaded. To load the table, first call the
Navigator (Backup Database) from the File menu.
FIG 9
The Browse key (FIG 9) activates the Path dialog window with the import directory (see README files)
from which a subdirectory with the scan tables for the receiver used is selected.
FIG 10:
Subdirectory K10/EHS with scan tables for Receiver EHS
Then the required scan tables designated with the name of the standard are marked and transferred to
the scan table under Navigator... by means of Execute.
The standard import database is stored in the same directory in which the ES-K1 Software was
installed. The scan and sweep tables can be selected from the subdirectories for the receiver versions
(K10, K11, etc).
1026.6819.42
1-22
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.3.4.1 Performing the Measurement
When preparatory operations as described under 1.3.4 are completed (required only after installation,
not for recall of ES-K1 Software), the measurement task as defined in chapter 1.3.1 is performed
through the following steps:
Call Navigator from the File menu. In the Navigator window (FIG 11), click on Open under Function
and select Scan Table under File Type. Under File Name, select EN55014 Voltage and click on OK.
The Scan Editor window (FIG 13) will appear.
FIG 11:
Navigator database manager selected from File menu. Selection of Open function and
Scan Table file type. Calling of EN55014 Voltage file.
The Scan Editor window usually already contains data from previous settings. What the operator has to
do is to edit the data to make the required settings for each subrange. The Subranges list box (upper
right in FIG 16) is of primary importance. The list box will however be empty after installation of the
software. In this case, proceed as described under 1.1.4.2.
It is important to note that for each subrange selected from the Subranges list box the settings in the
Subrange window below are made separately, while the settings made under Unit, Detector and Mode
above apply jointly to all subranges. It is therefore advisable to assign one of the four possible detectors
(MaxPeak, Average, QuasiPeak and RMS, selectable under Detector) to each of the four curves
(Curve 1 to 4). Desired detectors for the individual subranges can then be selected from the Control
window below the Subrange window.
Select the desired subrange from the Subranges list box by means of a double click . The associated
settings will be displayed in the Subrange window.
1026.6819.42
1-23
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.3.4.2 Editing Data in Scan Editor Window
1.3.4.2.1 Adding a Receiver
By clicking on Receiver in the Subrange window, all receivers entered in the Device Configuration
table can be called. The selected receiver is shown with the settings stored in previous measurements
displayed in the various windows under Subrange. Make the required settings including
Attenuation/Gain, Transducer, Curve 1 to 4 and Demodulation. Conclude settings with Subrange
Check. Click on Insert (upper right). In doing so, make sure that the blue selection line in the
Subranges list box indicates a frequency range higher than the subrange to be added. Otherwise an
error message will be output. Store setting with OK.
1.3.4.2.2 Changing a Frequency Range
Select frequency range from Subranges list box with blue selection line. Double-click on frequency
range to activate it. All associated settings will appear in the Subrange window. Change range as
required and conclude setting with Subrange Check. If the new value does not match existing settings
(eg artificial mains network above 30 MHz), the operator is prompted to make an appropriate correction.
Click on Modify to confirm the change. Store with OK.
1026.6819.42
1-24
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.3.4.2.3 Deleting a Frequency Range
Select frequency range from Subranges list box with blue selection line. Activate range by means of
single click. Then click on Delete and store with OK.
FIG 12:
Scan Editor - EN55014 Voltage
FIG 13:
Scan Editor - EN55014 Voltage, after double-click on test receiver marked blue in
Subranges list box and calling of transducer ESH3-Z5; confirmation with Insert in the
upper right. Curve 4 (rms detector in this case) is not available for ESHS.
It should be noted that MaxPeak in conjunction with 10 ms measurement time will provide a coarse
result for orientation only. For measurements in line with standards, the quasi-peak detector would have
to be selected for curve 1, as well as a measurement time of 1 s. However, this would lead to
uneconomical measurement times, so a time-saving approach (subrange analysis) is usually taken for
this type of measurement.
The DUT in this measurement task is a pure broadband interferer. This means that it does not cause
sinusoidal interference on just a single frequency. In this special case, it is not obligatory to measure at
1026.6819.42
1-25
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
each single frequency of the range but the range can be scanned in steps larger than the bandwidth of
the test receiver. It is appropriate to select logarithmic steps. With a step size of 12.5%, total
measurement time at each frequency will in this case be just about 1 min 40 s even for the standardconforming measurement time of 1 s.
Logarithmic scanning in 10 % steps
FIG 14:
Selection of logarithmic scanning. It should be noted that the step size actually selectable
depends on the receiver characteristics. Type ESxS and ESPC receivers allow for step
n
sizes with a factor of 100%/2 only, ie 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, etc. The nearest possible
step size is set and displayed in the Step Size window after clicking on Insert. In this case,
this is 12.5%.
1026.6819.42
1-26
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.3.5 Measurement
1.3.5.1 Example of Virtual Measurement
The measurement described in this section is based on the settings made in the previous sections 1.3.3
and 1.3.4. In this case, however, no hardlock is installed (virtual measurement). Results (FIG 18) are
supplied by an internal function generator (simulated by the software). The measurement described is
therefore suitable for demonstration.
Select Test from the menu line of the initial mask. From the Test menu, select Measurement and then
Scan (FIG 19):
FIG 15
Calling Measurement and then Scan from the Test menu
Click on Scan. The scan settings made before are displayed (FIG 20).
FIG 16
Scan settings. Note: No rms measurement will be performed because Curve 4 (rms
detector) cannot be selected in the Scan Editor since Receiver ESHS contains no rms
detector. Despite this, Result 4 (rms value) is included in the Scan Settings because it is
possible that a subrange not used here is used by an ESS (with rms detector), and the
scan table applies to all subranges.
1026.6819.42
1-27
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
The measurement is activated by clicking on Start.
The graphics shown in FIG 18 is displayed while the measurement is being performed. The icons
numbered 1 to 8 for the various curve configurations can be assigned as required to the two test curves
(QP (quasi-peak) and AV (average)) and to the limit lines from the database.
QP limit line to
EN 55014
AV limit line to
EN 55014
Max peak test results
QP test results
AV test result
FIG 17:
Display of results
Autoscale Y
Grid configuration
Delta marker
Marker
Trace editors (max. 8 traces)
Autoscale X
FIG 18:
The line of icons above the chart is used for configuring the chart with the test curves as
required. Particularly helpful is the zoom function, which is always active and operated with
the lefthand mouse key. The icon is for returning to the unzoomed chart.
1026.6819.42
1-28
E-8
ES-K1
Introduction
1.3.5.2 Practical Measurements
1.3.5.2.1 Measurement of Broadband Interferer in Range 150 kHz to 30 MHz
FIG 19:
Scan Editor. Note that curve 4 is switched off in this case too because ESHS contains no
rms detector.
[dBµV]
[dBµV]
120
120
100
100
80
80
60
60
40
40
20
20
0
0
-20
9k 20k 40k 100k200k400k 1M 2M3M 5M 10M
[Hz]
MES
MES
LIM
LIM
MES
FIG 20:
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
55014
55014
55014
55014
55014
-20
150k 300k 500k
30M
MES
MES
LIM
LIM
MES
Voltage QPk
Voltage Avg
V QP
V AV
Volta MaxPk
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
1M
2M 3M 4M 6M
[Hz]
55014
55014
55014
55014
55014
10M
30M
Voltage QPk
Voltage Avg
V QP
V AV
Volta MaxPk
Display of results. Left: using graticule stored in previous measurement with frequency axis
from 9 kHz to 30 MHz. Right: after clicking on "Autoscale X" icon
. ESHS test
sequence: QP and AV values determined in first run, MaxPeak in second run.
1026.6819.42
1-29
E-8
Introduction
ES-K1
1.3.5.2.2 Measurement of Broadband Interferer in Range 9 kHz to 30 MHz
FIG 21:
Note: 149 kHz is the highest frequency selectable for CISPR band A (9 kHz to 150 kHz) in
conjunction with a bandwidth of 200 Hz and QP display. The program will not accept the
value 150 kHz for CISPR band A with QP and 200 Hz bandwidth.
[dBµV]
[dBµV]
90
120
80
100
70
80
60
60
50
40
40
30
20
20
0
-20
9k
10
0
20k 40k
MES
MES
LIM
LIM
MES
FIG 22:
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
100k 200k 400k
[Hz]
55014
55014
55014
55014
55014
1M
2M 3M 5M
10M
30M
9k
20k 40k
MES
MES
LIM
LIM
MES
Voltage QPk
Voltage Avg
V QP
V AV
Volta MaxPk
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
100k 200k 400k 1M
[Hz]
55014
55014
55014
55014
55014
2M 3M 5M
10M
30M
Voltage QPk
Voltage Avg
V QP
V AV
Volta MaxPk
Display of results. Left: in default diagram. Right: in diagram with level range adjusted as
required by clicking on Autoscale Y icon
.
From the above figure it can be seen that the legend for the curves is printed completely on the
hardcopy. On the screen, there is only one line displayed at a time; the lines for the other curves can be
displayed by scrolling.
1026.6819.42
1-30
E-8
2 Graphical User Interface
1026.6819.42
2-0
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.1 Overview
The graphical user interface is very similar to the widely used standard interface for MS-WINDOWS.
This environment permits the user to perform all operations in interactive mode. The dialogs and input
masks provide a complete overview of all possible settings, such as file and graphics operations,
parameter settings, measuring and analyzing functions, etc. The measurement results can be easily
transferred to other WINDOWS programs in tabular or graphical format.
When using the mouse (or the trackball), various functions are very easily accessible by means of the
fields in the Main Toolbar. The same is true for the Device Toolbar, which permits to start the device
dialogs (activation in the menu Options):
As soon as the mouse cursor rests one second on an icon then an explanation is displayed next to the
icon. Note: At that moment the global Windows system keys like e.g. ALT+TAB are not effective.
The status bar is used to display short help texts for various menu items:
The background of the main window of the application can be assigned a graphics of the WMF type
(Windows Metafile Format), i.e. a vector graphics. E.g. a representation of the test setup generated with
a respective graphics program could be displayed there. Any WMF file can be defined as Background
display via a file selection window.
The graphical user interface contains the following submenus:
File
Edit
Test
Options
Window
Help
The submenus are explained in greater detail in the following chapters.
1026.6819.42
2-1
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.2 Files
The core of the software contains a local database for management of all occurring file types. This data
base uses its own file names and file attributes, which are not directly derived from a DOS file system.
Thus it is possible to use longer file names and any additional descriptional texts for each database
element.
In the following, database elements are referred to as files, however, they are not to be understood in
the sense of DOS files.
By exporting database elements, a new external database is created or extended (e.g. on a floppy disk),
from where these data can be imported again at a later point in time.
File functions are selected from two Navigators in the File menu. One Navigator provides functions on
the internal (local) database whereas the other one offers the functions on external (exported)
databases.
File functions on the internal database:
Delete
Export
Move
New
Open
Rename
Save As
File functions on the external database:
Delete Backup Files
Import
Note:
File names should not contain special characters and should not start with a blank or an underscore.
1026.6819.42
2-2
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
The submenu New offers all kinds of file types.
Open is possible only with files that already exist.
If a new or existing file of any file type is opened for editing then the matching editor will be automatically
loaded.
If a new file has been created or modified, this modification has usually not been stored yet. Using Save
or Save As the file is saved under its existing name or under a new name (in the local database).
Rename simply changes the name of a file.
Using Delete a file can be deleted from the local database, unless it can be modified by an editor at this
point in time (e.g. an opened graphic). It is also possible to mark several files of the same file type and
delete them at the same time.
The function Export permits to export files. To this end, a drive must be selected first. The files to be
exported are marked and copied to the external database by means of Execute; should this database
not exist yet, it is newly created there. If retention of the user name is not activated, the file is copied with
the attribute Public.
Move means that files are exported and right after deleted. This way it is possible to easily archive data
that are currently not being used, e.g. onto a server.
The function Import permits files to be copied from external databases to the local database. To this
end, a drive must be specified and the required file type selected (depending on the contents of the
external database). The individual files can then be marked and imported using OK. A prompt protects
against unintentional overwriting of the files in the local database.
For Import the drive and the directory path can be set by making use of the Browse... dialogue. The
total pathname will be shown in a text field.
The same is true for Export and Move. With these functions the pathname can also be edited. If the
given path doesn't exist then it will be automatically created with the first file transfer.
Note that the maximum length of the path must not exceed 37 characters.
1026.6819.42
2-3
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
Export and Move can optionally be done in a way so that all transferred files in the external database
will have the file attribute 'read only' thus automatically protecting those files against overwriting. On the
other hand Import can change the file attribute of all transferred files to 'read/write' thus enabling
immediate editing of those files.
Besides, with Export, Import and Move either all files of the current filetype or the whole source
database can be selected for the transfer. This way a complete backup can easily be done (also see
filetype 'Test Configuration').
The menu item Delete Backup Files is used to delete specific files in an external database (i.e.
exported files).
The field Filter allows to reduce the displayed file names to those which match the string characters,
with an asterisk representing any sequence of characters (similar to MS-DOS wildcards for file names).
The following table shows all available File Types including their function:
File type
Sequence
Script
Function
A sequence of scripts
An automatic test procedure
Script Parameters
Measurement result
Graphics
configuration
Limit line
Transducer
Definition of script parameters
Display of measurement results
Definition and display
of graphics
Definition of limit line
Definition of probe transducer (e.g.
for antenna, absorbing clamp)
Definition of system transducer
(e.g. for cables, paths)
Definition of report header
Definition of report configuration
Definition of scan table
Definition of sweep table
Definition of frequency list
Definition of files belonging to a test
Definition of a description text
System transducer
Report header
Report configuration
Scan table
Sweep table
Frequency list
Test configuration
Text file
Editor
Sequence editor
Script editor (can only be operated
with option ES-K2)
Script parameter editor
Table editor
Graphics configuration editor
Table editor
Table editor
Table editor
Report header editor
Report configuration editor
Scan editor
Sweep editor
Table editor
Test configuration editor
Text editor
The associated files are displayed in the selection window File Name. When a file is selected (when a
letter is entered, the mark slips to the first file with the same intial, if provided), file-specific information is
output in an extra field. This information is user-defined and can be edited by clicking on the key
Description (see below).
In a further field, the drive (belonging to the local database) and the available storage capacity are
displayed.
OK is used to check the entries; when a file is created or opened, the respective editor is loaded. Abort
closes the dialog window without saving the settings.
The key Description permits to edit specific file information. The following dialog window appears on
the screen:
1026.6819.42
2-4
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
The user may enter the purpose of the file in the editable field Short Description. For a detailed
description, use the input field below.
The access status of the file ("read/write", "read only", "not removable") can be set in the window
Attribute.
The window Owner refers to a fixed reference of the respective file, at the moment only for script
parameter sets. It indicates with which script the respective parameter set is connected.
In the text field Application Info the user name of the original user of the file is additionally recorded;
this text field cannot be edited.
With User Group, the file is either assigned to the user group which includes the original user of the file,
or defined as "Public", i.e. generally accessible.
OK is used to check and save the settings, Abort, on the other hand, ignores them; in both cases, the
window is closed.
Close (menu File) is used to close an open text file or graphics configuration, which means that it is no
longer available for processing for the time being. If the file has been modified, the user is asked
whether he wishes to store the modifications in the file. Without storage, the modifications will be lost for
good.
1026.6819.42
2-5
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.3 Filetypes
2.3.1 Script
A script constitutes an automatic program run which is controlled by the program text (FSL = Flexsys
Script Language; similar to the programming language PASCAL) (Interpreter). Thus, almost all functions
that are accessible in interactive mode can be automated so that even complex measurement runs can
still be operated and reproduced.
Generation or modification of a script is performed by the script editor of the script development
environment (Option ES-K2); it also permits to execute scripts in single steps and inspect variables
(debugger).
2.3.2 Script Parameters
A script can be assigned parameters. The script parameters can be edited directly or when the script is
started and can be stored as a complete parameter set. Various parameter sets can be created for each
script that uses script parameters. During execution of a script, all parameters are constant, i.e. they
cannot be changed any more.
2.3.3 Sequence
A sequence describes a sequence of automatic program runs or scripts. If the individual scripts are
executed without user interaction, very complex measurement tasks can thus be handled fully
automatically.
2.3.4 Measurement Result
A measurement result (trace) consists of a list (thousands of lines are possible) with columns for
frequency and level. A measurement result is produced by functions such as scan or sweep, which is
why the name of the respective scan or sweep table is also recorded internally.
2.3.5 Limit Line
Complying with a specification, limit lines are frequency-dependent maximum values for measured
values, displayed as lines. They are defined as frequency/level pairs, the level being assigned the
required unit.
2.3.6 Transducer and System Transducer
Since the measuring instruments only measure the voltage at the input, the measured values must be
corrected in order to take into account the frequency characteristic of sensors and cables.
The (probe) transducer describes the frequency-dependent correction (represented as frequency/level
pairs) of sensors, i.e. antennas, current probes, etc., the associated level unit (dBµV, dBµA, dBµV/m,
etc.) having to be specified for the transducer.
System transducers, on the other hand, are correction values (frequency/level pairs) with the unit dB,
defining the frequency-dependent characteristics of cables, amplifiers, attenuators, power dividers, etc.
Note:
When opening a transducer file then a so called "source unit" will be displayed which cannot be
modified. It is the level unit found at the input of the measuring instruments, dBµV with EMI
measurements.
1026.6819.42
2-6
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.3.7 Graphics Configuration
A graphics configuration describes the appearance of the graphics (always level versus frequency).
Thus frequency range and level range are defined on the one hand and the elements to be displayed
such as traces, limit lines, transducers with type of display and colour on the other hand. Furthermore,
marker, deltamarker or legend are determined here.
2.3.8 Report Header
The report that is part of the test typically contains various specifications that are relevant to the test.
This includes e.g. test conditions, test site, designation of the EUT or name of the user. This information
is recorded as report header.
2.3.9 Report Configuration
For generation of a test report, a report configuration is used, which permits to vary the appearance of
the report. It permits to define a combination of e.g. report header, graphics and measurement results
which is to be included in the printout with this report configuration.
2.3.10 Scan/Sweep Table
A scan or sweep is used to record a section of the frequency spectrum.
In the case of a Scan, the test frequency is repeatedly increased by the defined step size (or, as an
alternative, set to the next frequency of a frequency list), and a (peak and/or average) level is measured
until the end of the specified frequency range has been reached. Depending on the specifications, a
single sweep may contain thousands of test points. A scan is usually a time-consuming procedure,
however, it permits to measure the spectrum in detail.
Contrary to this, a Sweep (only with analyzers) permits fast measurement of the spectrum (only with the
PEAK detector): the spectrum is also measured completely, however, with a limited frequency resolution
of e.g. 900 pixels per sweep. This resolution is usually not sufficient to analyze the spectrum thoroughly.
Sweeps therefore constitute an appropriate means for obtaining a fast overview of the spectrum,
whereas scans are required for a detailed analysis, not least because of the detectors defined in the
specifications.
All test parameters required for a scan or sweep - e.g. the setting of the attenuation, test bandwidth or
correction values to be used - are defined in a scan/sweep table which must always be selected for such
a measurement run.
2.3.11 Frequency List
A frequency list serves various purposes. It may be used, e.g., to display a list of ambients at an openarea test site, but also to list critical frequency points of a EUT, which are to be measured by means of a
frequency list scan.
1026.6819.42
2-7
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.3.12 Test Configuration
The filetype Test Configuration provides a link between files to export, move or import these files
bundled. For instance, a Test Configuration could contain a link to all those files that belong to a test or
to a test series.
Besides it is possible to create a kind of "test template":
On a server (in a directory that can only be read) there could be a number of test configurations
including all the linked files, ready for use with the Import function. By importing of one of those Test
Configurations, all files that are necessary to run a test (e.g. scan tables, transducers, limit lines, scripts)
could then be transferred into the local database.
Using the same Test Configuration - extended by the measurement results - could then enable to export
or move all the files from the test into a certain directory on e.g. a file server.
A Test Configuration is a kind of bracket around selected files with those files being listed only, i.e.
without the file contents. Through exporting, moving or importing of a Test Configuration those files
listed inside will also be transferred.
2.3.13 Text File
The filetype Text can hold any kind of text or comment (max. 30000 characters) that shall be part of the
application's database. Text files can be directly printed, be stored as a DOS text file (default extension
is .LOG) or be part of a test report.
1026.6819.42
2-8
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.4 Editors
2.4.1 Sequence Editor
The sequence editor is used to define a sequence for execution of the scripts.
A sequence of scripts with a defined parameter set each can be entered in a list.
2.4.2 Script Parameter Editor
If a script parameter set or a script containing script parameters is opened, the following dialog is
displayed (only with extended syntax for the parameter definition; without extended syntax, a less
complex dialog similar to the one in versions 1.3x appears):
The heading of the dialog contains both the name of the associated script and the name of the selected
script parameter set. The parameter set to be used is set using the selection menu at the very top of the
dialog window. The main parameters are shown below, the short description at the left and a select or
edit element at the right. In the lower area of the dialog, additional keys for further topics can be offered
depending on the syntax of the associated script. Thus, further groups of parameters are accessible.
The total script parameter set can be stored (maybe under another name) or printed out by means of
Print. If a script has been started, it is actually only run after the dialog has been left (the last
modifications are saved using OK or ignored using Cancel), unless the run is interrupted by means of
the additional Stop key.
1026.6819.42
2-9
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
Notes:
If a new parameter set is to be created using New..., an existing script must be defined as Owner in the
dialog Description....
If new parameters are added to a script, the old parameter set remains compatible. The additional
parameters are assigned their standard values.
If parameters are deleted from a parameter set, the parameter set can still be used.
If a script is deleted, all parameter sets assigned to the script are deleted as well.
2.4.3 Table Editor
The table editor permits the user to generate or modify frequency lists, limit lines, measurement results,
probe transducers and system transducers.
The editor is always loaded when a file of the given file types is opened or newly created.
The dialog window is divided into three areas. The upper area contains the selection window, where the
user may define e.g. units. The table contents are displayed in the middle area. The lower area contains
input fields.
The frequency unit is always offered, whereas a level unit is not available for frequency lists. The
intermodulation mode for the frequency can be set to linear or logarithmic for limit lines and transducers
(interpolated lines with linear or logarithmic display). The source unit is always dBµV (in the case of
transducers), the correction level unit is always dB for system transducers.
The lower input fields permit to enter new lines, which can be inserted into the list ahead of the active
line using Insert. As an alternative, the active line in the list can be overwritten by means of Modify.
Edit (or a double-click) permits to copy the contents of the active line into the input fields. The active line
can be removed from the list by means of Delete, which causes the next line in the list to become
active.
Copy permits to copy the complete contents into the clipboard. If particular lines have been selected
(marked), only these are copied. Thus data can be very easily transferred to other applications.
The menu item Print permits the complete list to be directly output to the printer without the need for a
report configuration.
The column layout can be extended (Add Column...) or modified (Modify Column x...) in various
ways: Up to ten columns can be represented, the elements of which can be edited almost at will (the file
types limit line, transducer and system transducer require rising frequencies). Added columns can again
be deleted "from back to front“ (Delete Column). The longer one of the two headings determines the
width of the column. Possible file types are floating-point numbers, integers or character strings (max.
15 characters); a large number of physical units is available for the unit of numerical values.
For Sorting of lists (only for file types measurement result and frequency list), a very flexible window
dialog is available:
1026.6819.42
2-10
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
Up to five columns can be defined as sorting keys (decreasing priority) with optionally rising or falling
values for the elements. Measurements which are not sorted with rising frequency, however, should not
be displayed with line graphics display, since the sequence in the list is valid for the graphics.
The columns described in the left field can be selected individually and entered or added as sorting
criterion by means of Add. Likewise, they can be removed again by means of Remove, the subsequent
entries being shifted accordingly.
Sorting is always accomplished with falling values if the associated select box has been marked,
otherwise, rising values are used. OK starts the sorting procedure.
The file type Limit Line also permits to define gaps by entering just a minus sign into the edit fields for
frequency and level:
The file type Frequency List is provided with a special function which allows comfortable editing of a
frequency list: Connect Input... determines from which of the opened graphics the marker frequency is
to be transferred to the edit field:
If there is such a connection, the frequency is continuously updated in the edit field of the frequency list
when the marker is shifted.
Data lists are often available as files. For example, ever more antennas are delivered along with a floppy
disk that contains the correction factor as a DOS (text) file in an ASCII format. Such a list can be easily
transferred into the ES-K1:
1026.6819.42
2-11
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
When creating a new table file (transducer, system transducer, limit line, measurement result list,
frequency list), then the empty columns (including those that are added) can be filled with the content of
the ASCII file. Before starting the import, the units for frequency, level, etc. have to be selected
according to those in the ASCII file. By selecting File => Import ASCII Table... the following dialogue
comes up:
The DOS filename (including pathname) of the ASCII file to be imported has to be entered in the field
Name. Alternatively the file can be searched in the file system by pressing Browse... . The number of
header lines to be skipped enables to ignore those lines that include header information - therefore a
modification of the ASCII file is not necessary.
The type of separators between numbers as well as between lines has to be defined. Separators
between numbers are blanks (spaces), tabulators or any other user defined character; carriage return or
line feed can be selected as line separators. Characters that cannot be part of a number will be ignored
until a valid field separator will be found. For example, a line like
+5.6789E+007MHz
+2.345E+001dBµV/m
3:45p.m.
will be correctly be interpreted if there is an extra string column defined.
If a column within a line cannot be filled then this will be indicated with an asterisk.
2.4.4 Graphics Configuration Editor
This editor permits the user to generate or modify a graphic. Graphics are used for presentation of the
measurement results. To this end, a number of functions such as Zoom, Marker, Legend and Element
configuration are available.
If the editor is loaded via New..., a standard value is assigned to each element and a standard graphics
appears on the screen.
1026.6819.42
2-12
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
The name of the graphic is indicated in the heading of the dialog window.
The dialog window is divided into two areas. The upper area contains the function bar for configuration
of the graphics elements. Up to 8 trace elements can be edited independently of each other. The lower
field displays the configured graphics. A complete graphics configuration comprises the elements grid,
traces 1 to 8, marker and legend.
All graphics settings are accessible via the menu item Edit.
The status information on marker and delta marker are then displayed in the graphics window above the
diagram.
Grid
The function Grid... permits the user to configure the grid on his own.
Value range, unit and label can be selected for the two axes separately. Besides, the scale type of the
X-axis may be defined as linear or logarithmic, whereas the Y-axis is aways linear. In addition, the dialog
permits to set the colour of the grid as well as to fade out the horizontal or vertical lines.
The frequencies of a diagram can easily be modified through shortcuts for the frequency units. A
frequency of e.g. 300 MHz can be entered as 300M .
The line style of the diagram grid can be selected. A doted line for example makes it easier to recognise
horizontal limit lines as well as harmonic signals from a quartz oscillator.
The (linear or logarithmic) display of voltages is also possible.
1026.6819.42
2-13
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
Trace
...
Using the function Trace x... the user can determine the graphics configuration on his own. When
selecting the trace element 1 to 8 the following dialog window is loaded:
Possible File Types for the display are measurement result, limit line, probe transducer and system
transducer. The appropriate file is selected in the field File Name; the trace can only be displayed if the
level unit corresponds to that of the diagram.
The alternative type of trace “constant“ is used to display a horizontal line; instead of a file name, the
associated level will be entered then.
The line style and the colour can be set for each trace; various options are possible for line and dotted
display.
Note: The active traces are always drawn „from back to front“, i.e. trace 8 is always at the very bottom
(but still on the grid), trace 1 is always at the very top.
Autoscale X
, Autoscale Y
Automatic scaling of the graphic - for the two axes separately - leads to a complete display of all
displayed traces. The associated value range of the grid is changed accordingly.
Marker
, Deltamarker
The functions Marker and Deltamarker permit the user to position two markers in the graphics for
interactive graphical evaluation of the measurement results. First, the marker is activated and
positioned. Then, the deltamarker can be added; however, it cannot be used without the marker.
The status information on marker and deltamarker is indicated inside the graphics window above the
diagram. The markers can be shifted using the mouse or the Cursor keys Left and Right. If the mouse is
used, the active marker can be moved by selecting the marker with the left mouse key and shifting it to
the new position with the mouse key depressed. When using the cursor keys Left and Right, the marker
is shifted in the desired direction on the trace. The speed at which the marker is moved can be
increased by means of the key combination Ctrl + Cursor key left / right. If Pixel Mode is activated, the
markers are not shifted on the trace points, but in the pixel grid of the graphics display. The function
Marker Coupled synchronizes the deltamarker to the marker. The currently active marker can also be
set to a particular frequency using Set Marker... (Ctrl + M) or to the maximum of the examined trace
using Marker -> Max and to the minimum using Marker -> Min. If more than one trace element is
displayed, the markers can be set to the next trace element using Next Trace or Previous Trace or by
means of the cursor keys Up/Down.
1026.6819.42
2-14
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
Zoom
The function Zoom permits the user to enlarge any section of a graphics area. The area is selected by
pressing the left mouse key and shifting to the opposite corner with the mouse key depressed. After
releasing the mouse key, the zoomed part of the graphics is displayed on the screen. Zooming is
possible several times. If the zoom is active, the function symbol is emphasized and permits to return to
the original display. Zooming enables to achieve better presentations, however, it is not taken into
account when the graphics configuration is saved.
Copy
A graphic can be copied to the clipboard with all included elements. It is not copied as a rigid pixel
graphic which requires a lot of storage capacity, but in a more complex and flexible WINDOWS-internal
vector format. The memory requirements are dependent on the contents of the diagram.
Print
If a printer driver has been installed for printing, a diagram can also be directly output as a whole-page
graphic without the need for a report configuration.
Legend
The function Legend provides a short description of the displayed trace elements.
Both the line style (short designation) and trace name are indicated for a trace element. It is possible to
change to the next trace element by clicking on the arrow keys. The key can then be switched on or off;
if it is switched on, the function symbol is emphasized.
The following short forms are used:
LIM
Limit line
MES Measurement result
XTP
Probe transducer
XTS
System transducer.
1026.6819.42
2-15
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.4.5 Report Header Editor
This editor permits the user to generate or modify a report header.
The text for the report header is entered into the editable fields. A text of max. 20 characters can be
entered in the left column, a text of max. 50 characters in the right column.
2.4.6 Report Configuration Editor
This editor permits the user to generate or modify a report configuration:
1026.6819.42
2-16
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
The actual configuration is indicated in the „Selection“ field, whereas the individual elements can be
selected in the „Available“ field.
The entries for the "selection“ are performed by means of Add. Each element (report header (max. 1),
scan or sweep table (max. 16 each), graphics configuration (max. 2), measurement result (max. 16),
probe or system transducer (max. 4 each), limit line (max. 4)) is determined in the selection windows
File Type and File Name in the "Available" field. An element selected in the „Selection“ field can be
removed using the Delete key.
The Graphic Arrangement can be set such that the diagrams are arranged half-page, at least halfpage until the end of page or whole-page.
Besides, all pages can be provided with a footnote consisting of date, time and a predefined text (max.
40 characters).
The layout of the test report can be defined to a certain extent.
For each part of the test report (e.g. report header, graphics, result list) a number of lines can optionally
be reserved. A value of '0' means no reservation, i.e., the number of printed lines simply depends on the
content of the referring part. If a number of lines is given, then exactly this number of lines will be
printed, which means that depending on the content of the current part there will be either empty lines at
the end or some lines may be cut off. The legend and the marker of a graphics diagram are handled
separately from the diagram, i.e., the graphics diagram can be printed in a reproducible size. Scan and
seep tables can optionally be printed in a compact format (the main parameters in a single line per
range and per detector).
The most recently defined layout will automatically be used as a default for a new report configuration.
When starting a printout with a report configuration then the content as well as the report header
selected inside can be edited (a shortcut for editing).
2.4.7 Scan/Sweep Editor
These editors permit the user to generate or modify a scan or sweep table. Such a table determines the
settings of the test receivers used for performing the scan/sweep.
The two editors are very similar, so that the differences will only be mentioned if required in the
following.
The dialog window is divided into two areas. The upper area displays the general settings of the scan
table. The settings of a selected subrange are indicated in the lower area (the appearance of the dialog
varies according to the selected receiver). For modification, the selection can be made by a double-click
1026.6819.42
2-17
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
on the selection window Subranges. The subranges (max. 30) can be edited independently of each
other.
Note:
The frequency ranges of the various subranges must not overlap. The frequency ranges must be
arranged in increasing order.
When a new table is created, the appropriate unit for the level and all required detectors (only peak in
the case of sweeps) are determined first. The detector mode MaxHold (maxima reduction) only makes
sense in conjunction with multiple scans/sweeps, otherwise the mode ClearWrite (overwrite) is used.
Subsequently, the subranges defined in the lower area can be lined up by means of Insert or
subsequently overwritten by means of Modify. By double-clicking on an existing subrange, the
associated parameters are transferred into the lower area.
For definition of a subrange, the appropriate receiver must be determined first, which causes the
remaining fields to be adapted to the facilities of the hardware and be assigned standard values.
The probe transducer must comply with the subrange with respect to frequency range and level unit, but
it can also be set to NONE for the time being. lf various switching paths have been defined by means of
the RSU superhandler, they can be selected as Signal Path, a System Transducer defined to this end
being displayed to the right (grey, i.e. cannot be changed). Up to three additional system transducers
for cable attenuations, etc. can also be activated.
Settings for the scan/sweep mode and for the receiver input used are also dependent on the hardware,
e.g. in the case of the Tracking Generator, which is only required for measurements on four-terminal
networks.
The fields for the start and stop frequency are to be defined such that the selected transducers match
the frequency range. Note that the settings of the next subrange are valid for the stop frequency if this
stop frequency is identical with the start frequency of the next subrange.
A step size can only be entered for scans; normally, it is determined by the IF bandwidth (factor of
approx. 0.5 to 0.7).
The IF bandwidth (resolution bandwidth), in turn, results from the specification; in the case of sweeps,
the video bandwidth may also be set.
The measuring time (for scans) or the sweep time is also dependent on the IF bandwidth, but also on
the detectors used.
The settings for attenuation/gain are dependent on the device used, of course. In particular in the case
of analyzers, note that the signal levels to be expected lie within the dynamic range. In the case of
scans, this can in most cases be achieved by activating the autorange function, which causes the
attenuation to be matched accordingly as soon as the signal exceeds the dynamic range.
Usually, demodulation of the test signal is only of interest for single measurements which are based on
a scan table.
In the case of analyzers, measurements according to the standard require the use of the Preselection.
The entries made for Setting control the procedure. On the one hand, it is possible to determine which
of the preselected detectors is to be used in the current subrange, on the other hand, a multiple
scan/sweep (repetition) can be defined, i.e. instead of “Single“ any multiple or even “Continuous“ (must
be aborted explicitly), which is also possible in combination with maxima reduction for the detector. In
the case of a few receivers, this may be performed by the device itself (Repetition by device), which
accelerates the procedure, however without updating the graphics.
If the procedure is to be aborted when changing from one subrange to the next, e.g. in order to be able
to mount another antenna, the stop mark must be activated. Thus, the procedure is stopped before this
subrange is executed and must be continued by the user (or, as an alternative, be aborted for good). In
addition, a stop message can be activated, so that the entered text (up to approx. 15 characters) is also
output; e.g. a prompt to mount a particular antenna may thus be output.
Check subrange is used to determine whether the specifications for the subrange are consistent. Then
the subrange can be transferred to the list of all subranges (appropriate position must be preselected)
by means of Insert or Modify; the table will be definitely stored when the dialog is closed with OK.
A scan or sweep table can also be defined with voltage as the measurement unit, a non-level unit. In this
case the transducers works as a linear factor (levels: the transducers are simply added to the raw
reading). Any additional system transducers (e.g. a cable loss or a preamplifier) can still be included (as
with levels) through the normal level definitions.
2.4.8 Test Configuration Editor
1026.6819.42
2-18
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
This editor can be used to generate or modify a test configuration (see 2.3).
The actual configuration is indicated in the "Selection“ field, whereas the individual elements can be
selected in the „Available“ field.
The entries for the "selection“ are performed by means of Add. Each element is determined in the
selection windows "File Type" and "File Name" in the "Available" field. An element selected in the
"Selection“ field can be removed using the Delete key.
2.4.9 Text Editor
The text editor is quite similar to the Windows text editor "Notepad". Text can be inserted at the current
cursor position. The position of the cursor (line ; column) is displayed in the right lower corner of the
editor window. Edit -> Wrap toggles the automatic line wrapping. The typical clipboard functions are
available in the same menu. The 'search' menu contains the function Search... and Replace... . F3
repeats a search or replace downwards, F4 upwards. Goto... enables to position the cursor into any line.
1026.6819.42
2-19
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.5 Report
The 'test report' function generates an output of test relevant results either onto a printer or into a file.
2.5.1 Print...
This function is used to output a report on the selected printer. Before the output can be started, the
report configuration to be used has to be selected (the layout of the dialog depends on the operating
system):
From this dialog it is possible to edit the content of the report configuration as well as the report header
selected inside (a shortcut for editing).
If a graphics configuration or a list file only shall be printed, then the dialog looks quite similar, but
without any selections referring to report configurations.
With Preview a print preview of the hardcopy layout will be started. The preview window enables to
display the pages either separate or two at a time.
Pressing the Print button starts the normal hardcopy on the selected printer.
If the option "Redirect to RTF file" is selected, then with Print no hardcopy will be created, but instead
a file dialog will come up (with Preview after closing of the preview window) which enables to specify the
file name (and the path) of the RTF file to be created.
An RTF file ("Rich Text Format") stores texts and graphics in a generic Windows format which can
directly be imported into any text processing software with the ability to edit the file further in any way.
This way a complete test report can be stored in a single file which can be used at a later time (maybe
on another PC) to generate documentation on the test.
1026.6819.42
2-20
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.5.2 Printer Setup...
This function is used for selection of the printer device driver only. The available device drivers are
displayed. The selection is made by clicking on the device driver name. The associated interface is also
shown.
Properties... permits to specify the settings of the selected printer (e.g. output format, paper feed, etc.)
Notes:
In the event that the provided printer is not listed in the selection window, the respective device driver
must be installed. A detailed description is to be found in the WINDOWS operating manual or can be
optained by the WINDOWS online help.
A report can be output into a file in ASCII format. For this purpose, the device driver Generic/Text only
must be provided together with the interface FILE:, installed as continuous printer without formfeeds.
During the output, an additional window for entering a DOS file name is opened. This ASCII file can be
easily imported into other software applications.
1026.6819.42
2-21
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.6 Special Functions
2.6.1 Configuration
The function Save Configuration... enables the user to save all files of the application that include
configuration data (*.INI) in a given directory on floppy disk or hard disk (as copy).
Vice versa, Load Configuration... permits a software configuration to be restored. Thus, the
configuration can also be used for another installation of the software.
After this step the application must be closed and restarted!
2.6.2 Quit (Alt-F4)
Terminates the program ES-K1 and saves various general settings. If files have been modified but not
saved yet, an additional prompt is displayed.
1026.6819.42
2-22
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.7 Options Menu
The menu Options is used for setting general parameters, e.g. device configuration and dialog
language.
The menu consists of the following functions:
Device Configuration
Selftest
Simulator
Login
User List
Change Password
Edit Accessory
Configure Accessory
Main Toolbar Visible
Device Toolbar Visible
Toolbar Strings Visible
Status Bar Visible
Background
Change Language
The functions will be explained in detail on the following pages.
2.7.1 Device Configuration
The function Device Configuration enables the user to incorporate new devices in the software or modify
the configuration for the provided devices.
The loaded device drivers are displayed in the upper selection window. They can be selected by doubleclicking on the device name. Then the specific device settings can be performed.
1026.6819.42
2-23
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
All device functions can be executed in two different operating modes:
a) physical mode
The parameters are set on the device.
b) virtual mode
The settings are simulated by the software. The device is not addressed.
A (newly) installed device driver can be inserted by means of Load. After actuating the key, the
respective device can be selected for editing in the selection window Device.
The device to be incorporated (designation of the device driver) is selected by means of Device; the
function Load must already have been executed.
The Name is used to establish a reference to the software.
A short description - e.g. "Analyzer" - can be assigned to each device.
When the software is started, the communication via the specified interface is checked. The software
settings must comply with the implemented hardware. The interface "GPIB0" (IEEE bus) is used as
standard.
The IEEE address is important for the connected devices. For proper communication, the IEEE
addresses in the device configuration must comply with the hardware settings on the device.
The operating mode determines whether the device is to be operated in physical or virtual mode.
All devices that are to be addressed or simulated via the software must be set to active. Before a device
can be set to active, the respective device driver must be installed. The software recognizes an existing
device driver, and Yes is displayed in the column Active. If the instrument is just being used, Yes is also
entered in the column Busy.
Modify is used to transfer the modified settings to the device configuration.
Insert transfers the settings to the device configuration (above the currently selected device) as a new
device.
Delete is used to remove the selected device from the device configuration.
The definition of the device-specific Properties (see description of the respective device driver) must
comply with the hardware of the device.
2.7.2 Selftest
The menu item Selftest repeats checking of the device list (according to the device configuration) as in
the case of the software start. This is particularly useful if one or several devices were not yet in
operation by mistake when the software was started: In this case, the software does not have to be
restarted, and correction of the device configuration (for subsequently changing the devices not found
from the virtual to the physical operating mode) is not necessary.
Note: The abbreviation "HDI" means "handler device interface" and refers to the interface, normally to
the GPIB system. If an error message tells about an "HDI" problem, then make sure that the devices to
be controlled are ready for operation (maybe switching off and on again helps) and that all bus cables
are working properly.
1026.6819.42
2-24
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.7.3 Simulator
The function generator permits to simulate a scan or sweep with devices operated in virtual mode. A
dialog window is opened for defining the settings (see below). A total of up to 5 basic functions can be
superimposed (see below). The basic function is selected by clicking on the white triangle in the function
symbol.
Sine function
y(f) = y0 + a * sin(2π * (f - f0) / F)
Amplitude (a), level offset (y0), period (F) and freq. offset (f0) can be specified in a dialog window
by clicking on the function symbol. The sine function can be used for simulation of broadband
interference.
1026.6819.42
2-25
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
Si-Function ( sin(x)/x )
y(f) = y0 + a * sin(2π * (f - f0) / F) / (2π * (f - f0) / F)
Amplitude (a), level offset (y0), period (F) and freq. offset (f0) can be specified in a dialog window
by clicking on the function symbol. The Si-function can be used for simulation of narrowband
interference.
Square function
y(f) = y0 with f < s and f > e
y(f) = a + y0 with s ≤ f ≤ e
Amplitude (a), y-offset (y0), start frequency (s) and stop frequency (e) can be specified in a dialog
window by clicking on the function symbol. The square function can be used for simulation of
broadband interference.
Random function
y(f) = [min ; max]
Minimum value (min) and maximum value (max) can be specified in a dialog window by clicking
on the function symbol. The random function can be used for simulation of background noise.
2.7.4 Login, User List and Change Password
The Software ES-K1 is provided with password protection. This is of great importance for two reasons:
1. the data are protected against unauthorized access
2. the system configuration is only changed by authorized people
The program includes three user classes with different rights of access:
1. System manager
2. Extended
3. Standard
Besides, every user is assigned to a user group.
The rights of access are distributed as follows:
Ÿ The system manager has access to all components and data of the software.
user with extended access rights is assigned the same access rights as a system manager,
Ÿ The
with the following exceptions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Processing of the device configuration
Processing of the path configuration
Processing of the user groups
Processing of the user list
Processing of the files outside his group (exception: files with the attribute Public may be
processed)
user with standard access rights has the same access rights as a user with extended access
Ÿ The
rights, with the following exceptions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Processing of the file type script
Reading of the files outside his group (exception: files with the attribute Public can be
read)
1026.6819.42
2-26
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
When the software is started, the following dialog window appears:
The user must enter his user name and password in this window. On pressing the OK key, the settings
are checked and, in the case of a correct login, the main menu is entered.
The Cancel key is used to abort the start of the software and open Windows.
Option Login
This function is used to reregister a user in the software. The currently registered user is thus logged out
automatically.
Besides, the same is true as for login on starting of the software.
Option Change Password
To change the password, both the old and the new password must be entered (twice to avoid typing
errors):
1026.6819.42
2-27
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
Option User list
In this dialog window, a user group and a user class are assigned to the user and made known to the
system. The password can also be cancelled in this window, which permits the respective user to assign
a new password without having to specify the old one:
For every user, an existing user group is to be selected and one of the three user classes allocated.
The list of user groups can be edited via an extra dialog window:
2.7.5 Edit Accessory and Configure Accessory
see 2.8.4.2 Single Measurement
2.7.6 Main Toolbar, Device Toolbar and Status Bar
see 2.1 Overview
1026.6819.42
2-28
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.7.7 Background
see 2.1 Overview
2.7.8 Change Language
This function permits the user to change the language used in the dialog; at the moment, only English
and German are offered.
1026.6819.42
2-29
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.8 Measurement Functions
The menu Test is used e.g. for execution of the various measurement functions, for starting of scripts
and for operation of the devices.
2.8.1 Interactive Device Dialog
Set Device permits to select a device entered in the device configuration for single operation. This
function is identical with the selection of a device with the (activated) Device Toolbar. The dialog window
of the respective device driver is opened and the settings can be made by the user in interactive mode.
If an error occurs during the device access, the cause of the error must be determined by referring to
the operating manual of the device involved. A detailed description of the dialog windows can be
obtained from the respective description of the device driver.
2.8.2 Sequence
Execute Sequence... offers a choice of the provided sequences. A selected sequence can then be
started using Start and is continued until the end unless it is aborted before by pressing the keys
Immediate Stop or Stop on Script term..
2.8.3 Script
Execute Script... offers all provided scripts, however, only “main scripts" (MAINSCRIPT) can be
started, whereas all other scripts are included in the main scripts (INCLUDE"...", SUBSCRIPT).
After confirming the selection by means of OK, the devices are checked. The devices that are in virtual
mode are indicated in a window.
1026.6819.42
2-30
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
Subsequently, the dialog for the script parameter editor is displayed. It permits to select and edit the
desired parameter set (see 2.4.2)
The script is executed using OK or Cancel (the last modifications on the parameter set are saved or
ignored) or aborted using Stop. During the script run, the script can be interrupted and continued again
or aborted for good.
2.8.4 Measurement Functions
The submenu Measurement permits to select the EMI measurement functions. The following
measurement functions are offered:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Scan
Sweep
Single measurement
2.8.4.1 Scan and Sweep Functions with Automatically Generated Graphics
As soon as a table has been selected in the dialog for starting a scan or a sweep, the remaining fields
are assigned names (derived from the table names) and the entire frequency range of the table is set. It
is then possible to vary these entries at will, e.g. to define a limited frequency range or skip a suggested
detector by deleting the result name. If the receiver is not capable of measuring in parallel with various
detectors, the traces are recorded sequentially.
1026.6819.42
2-31
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
In the case of scans, it is additionally possible to select a frequency list. In this case, the measurement
is not made with the step size specified in the scan table, but only at the frequencies of the frequency list
that lie within the given frequency range.
If Overwrite is set, already existing measured values are completely deleted and overwritten.
Otherwise, existing measured data are only overwritten or supplemented in the given frequency range.
If Autosave is set, the results are automatically saved. If the selection switch is not set, the data are lost
unless they are displayed as a list or graphically.
Besides, the dialog permits to generate a graphics configuration for all data (traces) produced in the
measurement run. For this purpose, a name for a configuration must be given for graphical display of
the measurement results. If there is no graphics configuration under the given name yet, a new
configuration with appropriate settings with respect to frequency range, level unit and traces is created.
Otherwise, the existing graphic is only opened and the traces are entered; this however means that it
might become necessary to adjust the diagram, thus making a currently measured curve visible.
When starting a scan or a sweep, then besides the graphics configuration the software also can create
a default test configuration or a default report configuration.
The test configuration holds all referring files: The scan/sweep range table, the transducer and system
transducers inside the range table, the graphics configuration, measurement results and the selected
report configuration (incl. its report header if defined).
If 'Overwrite' is selected then a new test configuration will be created. If not, then the entries will simply
be added into an existing test configuration.
As a report configuration either an existing one can be selected which will simply be added to the test
configuration, or a new one can be created which by default contains the following file entries: The
scan/sweep range table, the graphics configuration and scan measurement results if those results were
gained with a frequency list.
Once started, the progress of the scan or sweep can additionally be observed in a field at the current
frequency; note that scan results are supplemented in blocks, whereas in the case of sweeps, only
complete sweep subranges (according to the sweep table) are added.
1026.6819.42
2-32
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
A scan or sweep can be interrupted by the user and continued again. As soon as the scan or sweep has
been aborted, it can be continued exactly at this position (frequency display), in the next subrange (if
provided) or at a given frequency: For this purpose, the frequency display must be edited appropriately;
depending on the set value, existing measurement results will be overwritten or there will be a gap in the
measurement run. Thus, a test does not have to be repeated completely if a sudden change in the
measurement conditions is detected immediately. The measurement run is simply aborted and
continued at a lower frequency after correction of the measurement conditions.
If the stop frequency of a subrange and the start frequency of the next subrange are identical, this
frequency is measured with the settings of the upper subrange. If both subranges are used, e.g. with
different antennas (transducers), the stop frequency of the lower subrange should be slightly reduced
(e.g. by one step size).
At the end of a scan or sweep, the frequency dependent transducer factor of the last range can
optionally be programmed into the receiver - depending on the instrument's capabilities (if the number of
correction values in the receiver is not sufficient then they will be interpolated). This way measurements
can be done from the front panel of the instrument without any control from the software, but still with
level readings that include a transducer correction. As long as the software controls the instrument, any
transducer correction will be done in the software only which is much faster. The transducer download
can be activated in the device properties dialogues of the receivers.
2.8.4.2 Single Measurement
The dialog for interactive single measurements offers the following functions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
a frequency variation is immediately set on the receiver with the next measurement
Ÿ
Ÿ
a measurement result is always produced or an existing measurement result varied or extended
Ÿ
the frequency variation by means of keys uses either the step size of the given scan table or the
frequencies of a selected frequency list
the measurement result can be extended by predefined columns which will be automatically
filled with the settings of accessories (polarisation, artificial mains network lines, etc.) at the time
of the measurement
the frequency display can be coupled to a marker located on a trace for display of the
measurement result
When a single measurement is started, the Scan Table to be used and an optional Frequency List are
to be selected:
1026.6819.42
2-33
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
When starting a single measurement, then the software can optionally create a default Test
Configuration which holds all referring files (scan/sweep table, transducer, system transducers,
measurement result file).
If 'Overwrite' is selected then a new test configuration will be created. If not, then the entries will simply
be added into an existing test configuration.
Subsequently, a choice of the Accessory Configuration is offered (determines the column layout of the
produced measurement result and the accessory to be connected; for editing of the configuration see
below). It is also possible to do without accessory configuration:
Then the actual Single Measurement dialog is displayed, which is used to control the respective
receiver and to store measurement results:
The frequency may vary throughout the entire frequency range of the associated scan table. Besides,
the detector and the measuring time can be varied; all other test parameters result from the settings of
the scan table.
The value for the measurement time can be defined at will; however, depending on the receiver used,
the next higher possible measuring time may be set on the instrument.
1026.6819.42
2-34
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
Using the key Measurement, the first measurement run is started and repeated continuously. Each
frequency variation causes a corresponding change on the receiver (a variation of detector or measuring
time is transferred by means of Measurement or a further frequency variation).
Save is used to insert the current measured value in the measurement result or vary it together with
accessory settings if selected and if the associated device dialogs have been started before (see
below).
The frequency display can be coupled to the marker of a diagram. For this purpose, the Coupled
Marker function must be activated in the dialog window on the one hand and an appropriate device
configuration opened on the other hand, in which the specified measurement result is indicated and on
the trace of which the marker is located. For already existing test points, the marker frequency and the
test frequency shown in the single measurement dialog correspond to each other, i.e. shifting of the
marker also causes a frequency variation in the receiver.
If a frequency list has been selected with the scan table, the Up/Down keys only permit to set the
frequencies of the list lying inside the frequency range of the scan table; of course, additional
intermediate values can be set by editing the frequency display, and the measurement result can be
extended accordingly.
Columns can automatically be added to the measurement result, in which the current settings of
accessory devices are stored for each measurement. If a single measurement result is stored, the
associated accessory settings are automatically entered in the respective fields (i.e. next to frequency
and level, e.g. the turntable angle). To this end, the columns must be defined accordingly, i.e. the
columns must be assigned to the accessory (e.g. an automatic antenna mast) and the associated
parameter (e.g. polarisation). For this purpose, two dialogs are provided, the first one allowing to edit the
setup of all columns, the second one to produce a combination of these columns.
The menu item Edit Accessory (options) is used to open a dialog which permits to define a column for
each accessory parameter (of the accessory devices active in the device configuration):
The first heading must be clearly designated; the width of the column is determined by the longer one of
the two headings (max. 15 characters). When a (symbolic) device name has been selected, the
associated device command (query for a particular setting) must also be selected. Such a column
definition can then be appended to the existing list and also modified or deleted subsequently.
The second dialog is started by means of the menu item Configure Accessory (options):
1026.6819.42
2-35
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
The upper field lists the names of the column configurations, whereas the lower field shows all existing
column definitions (produced with the dialog Edit Accessory). When a name has been selected in the
upper field, the associated columns are marked in the lower field; this marking can be changed at will
(best to be done using the mouse key with simultaneously pressed Ctrl key) and any combinations can
be formed, which become valid immediately when the dialog is terminated with OK.
The edit field in the middle permits to generate new column configurations, which can be edited
immediately or subsequenty by means of a marking in the lower field.
To make a column configuration effective the following steps are needed:
First the device dialogs have to be started (they might be iconized).
Then the single measurement dialog has to be started, which requires to select a scan table (plus
optionally a frequency list and a test configuration, see above) and a column configuration.
Now a measurement can be started.
The name of the measurement result file has to be entered or selected.
When the Save key is pressed for the first time the columns will be added to the file and the result along
with the device positions will be stored.
1026.6819.42
2-36
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.9 Evaluation Functions
The menu Test is used e.g. for execution of the various analyzing functions. The submenu Evaluation
includes the following functions:
Acceptance Analysis
Peak Reduction
Subrange Maxima Reduction
Subrange Minima Reduction
Maxima Reduction
Octave Maxima Reduction
NB / BB Discrimination
Conversion to ... / MHz
Unit Conversion
Merge Data
Exclude Ambients
Weighted Addition
Reduce to Freq.List
GTEM Correlation
Most evaluation functions permit to generate a Graphics Configuration including all data relevant to
the evaluation (e.g. input/output files, limit line). To this end, a name for a configuration for graphical
display of the data must be specified. If there is no existing graphics configuration under the specified
name yet, a new configuration with appropriate settings of frequency range, level unit, traces, etc. is
created (if an evaluation function uses two different level units at the same time, two graphics
configurations are created accordingly); otherwise, the existing graphics is only opened.
The duration of the evaluation functions is usually a few seconds; however, it may be longer if large
input files are involved and if they are to be displayed graphically at the same time. The GTEM
Correlation requires very time-consuming calculations so that the size of the input file makes itself felt
clearly.
Evaluation functions with a specified limit line ignore all test points of the input file for which the limit
value is no longer defined.
2.9.1 Acceptance Analysis
The acceptance analysis is used to filter off signals which are further off a specified limit line. This
includes in particular the background noise of the receiver. The acceptance analysis is implemented by
means of an imaginary acceptance line which cuts off all measured values falling below it. The
acceptance line runs parallel to a limit line with a specified offset (e.g. an offset of -10 dB means 10 dB
below the limit line).
If the offset is very large (e.g. 200 dB), all signals are cut off, if it is very small (e.g. -200 dB), they are all
maintained.
1026.6819.42
2-37
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.9.2 Peak Reduction
This function is used to determine all "Peaks" (preferably narrowband interference) depending on a
user-defined decision level. For this purpose, the trace is analyzed by means of a special algorithm. The
decision level determines how far a local maximum must exceed the adjacent lower test points to be
considered as a "Peak" and appear in the output file (see flowchart on next page).
If a limit line is also specified, not the absolute level characteristic of the trace is examined, but the
distance between the test point and the respective limit value.
With a decision level of 0 dB, all local maxima are detected as "Peaks", wereas, with a value of e.g. 20
dB, only distinctive narrowband signals are detected.
1026.6819.42
2-38
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.9.3 Subrange Maxima Reduction
This function is used to split the trace of the input file into a given number (max. 1000) of subranges.
The maximum is determined for each subrange and transferred to the output file. If a limit line is also
specified, not the absolute level characteristic of the trace is examined, but the distance between the
test points and the respective limit value. The limits of the subrange are equidistant for linear or
logarithmic scales.
The function is suitable for detecting broadband signals in addition to narrowband signals over the
complete measured spectrum.
1026.6819.42
2-39
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.9.4 Subrange Minima Reduction
This function is used to determine the subrange minima of a measurement result. It is used for example
in open-area measurements: It permits to identify frequency points which are little or not at all occupied
by external signals. Such frequencies are best suited for measuring antennas or similar.
The handling of the parameters for subrange minima reduction is similar to that of the subrange maxima
reduction (see 2.9.3).
1026.6819.42
2-40
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.9.5 Maxima Reduction
This function is used to transfer a given number (max. 1000) of maximum levels of the input file into the
output file. If a limit line is also specified, not the absolute level characteristic of the trace is examined,
but the distance between the test points and the respective limit value. Thus it is possible to focus e.g.
on the 10 most critical points of a measurement result.
2.9.6 Octave Maxima Reduction
This function is used to split the trace of the input file into frequency octaves. For each octave, a given
number of level maxima is determined and transferred into the output file. If a limit line is also specified,
not the absolute level characteristic of the trace is examined, but the distance between the test points
and the respective limit value.
2.9.7 Narrowband/Broadband Discrimination
This function is used to discriminate between narrowband (NB) and broadband interference (BB). Four
methods are provided, the tuning methods analysing only the shape of the trace:
Peak/Average value comparison:
Two data lists are available, one being measured with the PEAK detector, the other with the AVERAGE
detector.
Narrowband interference:
(PEAK - AVERAGE) ≤ decision level.
Potential broadband interference:
(PEAK - AVERAGE) > decision level.
Peak/RMS value comparison:
Two data lists are available, one being measured with the PEAK detector, the other with the RMS
detector (root mean square).
Narrowband interference:
(PEAK - RMS) ≤ decision level.
Potential broadband interference:
(PEAK - RMS) > decision level.
1026.6819.42
2-41
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
Tuning methods
a) Tuning by +/- one bandwidth:
A data list is available that was measured with a scan step size of
0.45 ... 0.55 * IF bandwidth.
The decision range lies between reference level and the decision level (e.g. 3 dB below). A total of 2
adjacent levels are investigated.
Narrowband interference:
The 2nd adjacent levels lie below the decision range and the 1st adjacent levels lies below the reference
level.
Potential broadband interference:
The point has not been identified as being a narrowband signal.
Note:
Those points at the edge of a scan range will also be analysed, with the "missing" point assumed
as fulfilling the condition for narrowband interference.
Only potential broadband interference that is not located close to (+/- one IF bandwidth)
narrowband interference is actually determined as broadband interference.
b) Tuning by +/- two bandwidths:
A data list is available which was measured with a scan step size of
0.60 ... 0.75 * IF bandwidth
(0.45 ... 0.60 * IF bandwidth).
The decision range lies between reference level and the decision level (e.g. 3 dB below). A total of three
(four) adjacent levels are investigated.
Narrowband interference:
The 3rd (4th) adjacent levels lies below the decision range and the remaining two (three) adjacent levels
lie below the reference level.
Potential broadband interference:
The point has not been identified as being a narrowband signal.
Note:
Those points at the edge of a scan range will also be analysed, with the "missing" point(s)
assumed as fulfilling the condition for narrowband interference.
Only potential broadband interference that is not located close to (+/- two IF bandwidths)
narrowband interference is actually determined as broadband interference.
1026.6819.42
2-42
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
2.9.8 Conversion to ... / MHz
This function is used to add a broadband factor to a level as is required in particular specifications for
the description of broadband interference.
The level unit is changed to "level unit per MHz" (for military specifications in the USA). The IF
bandwidth depends on the scan or sweep table and the frequency at which the level has been
measured. The broadband factor is:
-20 * log(IF bandwidth / 1 MHz).
As a further "conversion" (numerical values remain unchanged), the unit can be changed to "level unit
per bandwidth" (for military specifications in France).
The following conversions are possible:
Level unit before
conversion
"dBµV"
"dBµV/m"
"dBµA"
"dBµA/m"
Level unit after conversion
with .../MHz
"dBµV/MHz"
"dBµV/m/MHz"
"dBµA/MHz"
"dBµA/m/MHz"
Level unit after conversion
with .../BW
"dBµV/BW"
"dBµV/m.BW"
"dBµA/BW"
"dBµA/m.BW"
2.9.9 Unit Conversion
This function is used for unit conversion. The following conversions are possible (R: characteristic
impedance, e.g. R = 50 ohms):
Unit
dBµV
dBµV/MHz
dBµV/m
dBµV/m/MHz
dBµA
dBµA/MHz
dBµA/m
dBµA/m/MHz
dBm
dBpW
dBpT
1026.6819.42
Unit after conversion
y dBµA = x dBµV - 20 log(R)
y dBpW = x dBµV - 10 log(R)
y dBm = x dBµV - 10 log(R) - 90
y dBµA/MHz = x dBµV/MHz - 20 log(R)
y dBµA/m = x dBµV/m - 20 log(R)
y dBµA/m/MHz = x dBµV/m/MHz - 20 log(R)
y dBµV = x dBµA + 20 log(R)
y dBpW = x dBµA + 10 log(R)
y dBm = x dBµA + 10 log(R) - 90
y dBµV/MHz = x dBµA/MHz + 20 log(R)
y dBµV/m = x dBµA/m + 20 log(R)
y dBµV/m/MHz = x dBµA/m/MHz + 20 log(R)
y dBpW = x dBm + 90
y dBµA = x dBm + 90 - 10 log(R)
y dBµV = x dBm + 90 + 10 log(R)
y dBm = x dBpW - 90
y dBµA = x dBpW - 10 log(R)
y dBµV = x dBpW + 10 log(R)
--
2-43
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.9.10 Merge Data
This function is used to merge all values of two measurement result lists. If the frequencies are the
same, the complete line will be entered into the data list with the maximum/minimum level
(Maxhold/Minhold). If the frequencies are not the same, both lines will be entered into the data list. The
column structure in the two data lists must comply with each other.
2.9.11 Exclude Ambients
This function is used for removing ambients from a measurement result.
Two methods can be selected:
1.
2.
All entries of the frequency range between a start and a stop frequency are removed.
Small ranges are removed according to a frequency list. A delta range about the frequencies
must be entered with a factor:
Delta range = Frequency * Factor * 10 ppm (10 millionth)
z.B.
Frequency= 100 MHz, Factor = 50
Delta range = 100 MHz * 50 * 10e-6 = 50 kHz , i.e. ± 25 kHz about 100 MHz
2.9.12 Weighted Addition
The weighted addition permits to treat two data sets in correlated (addition of the voltages),
uncorrelated (addition of the powers) or even direct mode (addition of the levels). In the direct mode,
even negative factors can be easily used, i.e. even any subtractions can be implemented, since the
values are not logarithmized:
1026.6819.42
2-44
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
direct:
dest = a * source1 + b * source2
correlated:
source1/20
source2/20
dest = 20 log [ a * 10
+ b * 10
]
source1/10
source2/10
uncorrelated: dest = 10 log [ a * 10
+ b * 10
]
a, b:
Factors (weighting) of the data sets.
2.9.13 Reduce to Frequency List
Using the evaluation function Reduce to Frequ.List, a frequency list can be generated from a
measurement result: As input file, an existing measurement result file is selected and, by means of the
evaluation function, an output file of the type frequency list is generated with the specified name.
Figuratively speaking, only the first column of the measurement result, i.e. the one with the frequency, is
transferred. Such a file may e.g. serve the purpose of running a scan only at the frequencies of this
frequency list.
2.9.14 GTEM Correlation
This function is used for converting emitted EMI that has been measured by an EUT in a GTEM cell
(Gigahertz Transverse Electromagnetic). This function permits to compare the data with the measured
electrical field of an open-area test site (OATS).
The correlation algorithm is based on the following model:
a) The test item is measued in the directions x, y and z in the GTEM cell. The respective results are
referred to as Vx, Vy and Vz.
b) Based on Vx, Vy and Vz the interfering power of the test item is calculated depending on the GTEM
dimensions.
c) The calculated interfering power is simulated as follows:
The test item is replaced by a dipole which is aligned according to the polarization of the test antenna
and corresponds to the calculated interfering power. The corresponding electrical fieldstrength is
calculated at the position of the antenna. In the case of an anechoic chamber with metal floor, the
maximum fieldstrength of the various antenna heights is the corresponding electrical fieldstrength.
Two methods can be selected:
a) Measurement result conversion
The interfering voltages Vx, Vy and Vz are measured. The fieldstrength characteristic is obtained by
means of correlation and can be directly compared with the respective fieldstrength limit line.
1026.6819.42
2-45
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
The input files correspond to the interfering voltages of the test item measured in three orthogonal
directions. At least one input file must be specified. The scan or sweep tables of the input files must be
identical. Input files that are not entered are set to zero.
The output files correspond to the fieldstrengths for horizontal and vertical polarization. At least one
output file must be specified. Output files that are not entered are not calculated.
b) Conversion of Limit Lines
In contrast to the first method, the fieldstrength limit line is first converted into a voltage limit line Vx,y,z
2
2
2 1/2
= (Vx + Vy + Vz ) . The advantage of this method is that the resulting interfering voltage from Vx,
Vy and Vz can be directly compared with the calculated limit line.
1026.6819.42
2-46
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
Additional values determines the number of the additional sampling points for calculation of the limit
line. Since the number of sampling points is usually very small and the conversion results in a more
complex trace, it is advisable to use more sampling points - e.g. 100. The calculation is performed in two
steps:
First of all, each point of the entered limit line (frequency / level) is converted.
In addition to the provided points, the entire frequency range is divided into the specified number of
sampling points, linearly or logarithmically (according to the intermodulation mode of the limit line).
Each of these sampling points (frequency / interpolated level) is then converted.
The output files correspond to the respective voltage limit lines of the entered fieldstrength limit line of
the standard used. A distinction is made between limit lines for horizontal, vertical and
horizontal+vertical polarization. Output files that are not specified are not calculated.
The key Start checks the settings and the correlation is started. When selecting the key Option ... an
additional dialog window for entering the parameters for the GTEM dimensions and the reference openarea test site is opened.
The fields GTEM Parameters permit to set the dimensions of the GTEM cell. The geometry of a GTEM
cell is defined by a = b and g = 0.36 * a. The values x and y indicate the middle of the test item. These
values are normally x = 0.0 and y = 0.5 * b. When changing the value b, the values for a, g and y are
automatically adapted. The value Z indicates the impedance of the GTEM cell, the standard value for Z
is 50 ohms.
The fields Test Site determine the dimensions of the reference open-area test site.
With semi anechoic selected, the measurement is simulated for a test site with conductive ground
plane. In this case, the maximum level is calculated between minimum antenna height hmin and
maximum antenna height hmax.
With full anechoic selected, on the other hand, the measurement is simulated for a test site with
absorbing ground plane. In this case, the level is calculated for one antenna height only.
1026.6819.42
2-47
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
2.9.15 S-LINE Correlation
This function is used for converting emitted EMI that has been measured by an EUT in a S-LINE cell
(Gigahertz Transverse Electromagnetic). This function permits to compare the data with the measured
electrical field of an open-area test site (OATS).
The correlation algorithm is based on the following model:
a) The test item is measued in the directions x, y and z in the S-LINE cell. The respective results are
referred to as Vx, Vy and Vz.
b) Based on Vx, Vy and Vz the interfering power of the test item is calculated depending on the S-LINE
dimensions.
c) The calculated interfering power is simulated as follows:
The test item is replaced by a dipole which is aligned according to the polarization of the test antenna
and corresponds to the calculated interfering power. The corresponding electrical fieldstrength is
calculated at the position of the antenna.
Two methods can be selected:
a) Measurement result conversion
The interfering voltages Vx, Vy and Vz are measured. The fieldstrength characteristic is obtained by
means of correlation and can be directly compared with the respective fieldstrength limit line.
The input files correspond to the interfering voltages of the test item measured in three orthogonal
directions. All three input file must be specified. The scan or sweep tables of the input files must be
identical.
The output file corresponds to the fieldstrength.
Algorithm:
2
S in [V ] , UMeas in [dBµV]
U Meas , x −120
S=
10
10
+ 10
U Meas , y −120
10
+ 10
U Meas , z −120
10
2
L in [dBµV/m] , f in [MHz] , S in [V ]
C1: Cell Correction Factor
C2: OATS Correction Factor
L = 106 + C1 + C2 + 20 log (f) +10 log (S)
1026.6819.42
2-48
E-8
ES-K1
Graphical User Interface
b) Conversion of Limit Lines
In contrast to the first method, the fieldstrength limit line is first converted into a voltage limit line Vx,y,z
2
2
2 1/2
= (Vx + Vy + Vz ) . The advantage of this method is that the resulting interfering voltage from Vx,
Vy and Vz can be directly compared with the calculated limit line.
Additional values determines the number of the additional sampling points for calculation of the limit
line. Since the number of sampling points is usually very small and the conversion results in a more
complex trace, it is advisable to use more sampling points - e.g. 100. The calculation is performed in two
steps:
First of all, each point of the entered limit line (frequency / level) is converted.
In addition to the provided points, the entire frequency range is divided into the specified number of
sampling points, linearly or logarithmically (according to the intermodulation mode of the limit line).
Each of these sampling points (frequency / interpolated level) is then converted.
The output file corresponds to the respective voltage limit line of the entered fieldstrength limit line of the
standard used.
Algorithm:
ULimit in [dBµV] , L in [dBµV/m] , f in [MHz]
C1: Cell Correction Factor
C2: OATS Correction Factor
ULimit = 14 - C1 - C2 + L - 20 log (f)
1026.6819.42
2-49
E-8
Graphical User Interface
ES-K1
The fields S-LINE-Parameter determine the the S-LINE type and the appropriate cell factor (a system
transducer).
The field Test Site enables to select the appropriate correction factor (a system transducer) for the site,
depending on the distance between EuT and antenna.
The Start button checks the settings and the correlation is started.
1026.6819.42
2-50
E-8
3 Standard Scripts
1026.6819.42
3-0
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
The standard scripts are designed for a maximum flexibility thus enabling to perform the tests most
effectively with all kinds of test equipment.
The design of the scripts helps to save time while still providing complete measurements as required for
compliance testing. Through a wide range of parameters (accessible after starting a test) that can be
stored and reloaded as "Script Parameters", it is possible to adapt and optimize the test proceedings to
the needs of the operator:
Ÿ
when a test has been completed, the results can be partially overwritten through
remeasuring in a second test, defining a frequency band only
Ÿ
the preview test can be skipped and instead a former preview result can be defined as an
input of the data reduction and the final test; alternatively, frequency lists or former final
results can be used as an input of a final test
Ÿ
in a semi automatic mode the operator can skip certain parts of the test (preview test, final
test, test report) or repeat the same test, then optionally leaving out other parts than during the
first pass
Ÿ
the total frequency range of the test can be split into subranges (linear or logarithmic, with
respect to the ranges of the range table) that will be completely tested (preview test, data
reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview and final test, which
is very useful with interference drifting over frequency; besides, this method reduces manual
interaction, if more than one probe transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for
30 - 1000 MHz in the field strength test: one single antenna change during the whole test)
Ÿ
an ID string makes it easy to identify results and other files related to the test: the string will be
used to build up default filenames (e.g. if test reports shall always include the same report
header), but it is also possible to define fixed names
Ÿ
since the variation of accessory devices (LISN, automatic turntable and antenna mast, etc.) can
be specified for preview and final test separately, it is possible to optimize the test to the test
equipment (the kind of test also influences the optimum concept):
EMI analyzer (fast sweeps with limited frequency resolution):
Ÿ
preview test with sweeps on a number of accessory settings, storing the maximum
levels and the corresponding settings
Ÿ
Ÿ
data reduction
final test on the accessory settings found in the preview test:
partial scans to compensate for the limited frequency resolution of the preview sweeps;
search for local maxima through fine tuning of the accessory (if possible)
measurements with final detector QP (+ AV);
EMI test receiver (relatively slow scans with high frequency resolution):
preview test with one or two scans on accessory settings, where all interesting
frequencies should be detectable (exact level information may be of less interest
because of the complete final test)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
data reduction, maybe with an increased acceptance offset to compensate for the few
preview settings
Ÿ
Ÿ
optional partial scans to detect drifting interference
Ÿ
measurements with final detector QP (+ AV) on the "worst case" accessory settings
measurements on all (predefined) accessory settings, storing the maximum levels and
the corresponding settings
besides the normal test results (frequency, level, etc.), frequency lists derived from the
preview or final results will implicitly be generated, labeled with the same name as the
1026.6819.42
3-1
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
corresponding source results; such a frequency list might be used to perform a scan on these
frequencies
Ÿ
the data reduction has a very flexible design: the scan or sweep results are analyzed on the one
hand with the peak reduction (a level threshold of 0 dB means no reduction; a value of 10 dB
means that only obvious pikes in the spectrum will come through; a value of e.g. 100 dB should
block all data), on the other hand with the subrange maxima reduction (number of subranges is
identical to the maximum number of results to be kept from each test range in the script): a
smaller level threshold means fewer subrange maxima will remain in the end; the remaining
points will be merged (only one list entry if frequencies are identical) and further filtered with an
acceptance analysis (cut off all points below an imaginary acceptance line; an acceptance offset
of e.g. -100 dB wouldn't filter any points); for certain tests where the measurements come close
to the sensitivity limitations of the instruments, the acceptance analysis can alternatively work
with an arbitrarily defined acceptance line (which means no offset in reference to a limit line) so
that the acceptance line goes above the noise floor; from the remaining points only those many
will be kept (the margin will be evaluated) as defined by the operator; if more broadband signals
shall be kept then the level threshold for the peak reduction (which finds narrowband
interference) should be set to a higher value.
Peak Reduction
Scan/
Sweep
Results
Merge Data
Subrange
Maxima
Reduction
Acceptance
Analysis
Maxima
Reduction
The optional interactive frequency selection enables to review the points that have been found through
the automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the test. To do so you
have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove" or "Test" in a dialog.
1026.6819.42
3-2
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Before the standard scripts can be used, some data has to be imported from the Standard Data import
directories:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
the scripts needed for testing plus the referring subscripts
the limit lines for the required specifications
the probe and system transducers that are used for the tests (the files hold typical values and
- if available - should be replaced with the exact values for the transducers in use)
for calibration tests the frequency lists if needed (for open area measurements the lists should
be adapted to the ambient interference of the test site)
In addition the required scan and / or sweep range tables have to be imported from the corresponding
import directories for the receivers(s) in use (ES-K1x); these range tables are already adapted to the
receivers and the test specifications, but they normally need some modification concerning the specified
transducers (depending on the test equipment).
When a script has been started, a window will come up that enables the operator to modify the so called
script parameters to control the proceedings of the test. Pressing <ENTER> or clicking the OK button
(modified parameters will be stored) or the Cancel button (modified parameters will be ignored) will
close this window and the test will run, using the stored settings of the script parameters; Stop aborts
the test immediately.
To select other (default) settings for the script parameters (e.g. to run the test with another
specification), the selection box on top of the script parameter window has to be used: a list with script
parameters matching those of the current test will come up; any of the given script parameter files can
be chosen to replace the current parameter settings; with Save As new parameter sets can be created.
A running test may be aborted at any time with the Stop button (an active sweep or scan might have to
be aborted before), but the measurements stored so far may be of only limited use. Afterwards the test
can't be continued but restarted from the beginning.
Although the scripts provide automatic printing at the end of a test, sometimes it may be useful to skip
the report, redefine some elements in the graphics configuration (e.g. line styles, colors, etc.), in the
report header or in the report configuration, and then start the report with the selection of Print... in the
File menu.
On the following pages there are some flowcharts that show in principle the steps of the tests:
1026.6819.42
3-3
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
START
Standard
Test
Procedure
initialise files, graphic
parameter checks
initialise test
optional queries
calculate next subrange
preview ?
no
yes
preview test
data reduction ?
no
yes
data reduction
final test ?
no
yes
final test
no
all subranges done ?
yes
report ?
no
yes
report
delete temporary data
END
1026.6819.42
3-4
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
START
Preview
Test
Procedure
check preview parameters
prepare files
reset accessory
perform sweep or scan
update accessory
data in results
merge results
accessory: next setting
all settings done ?
no
yes
END
START
Data
Reduction
peak reduction
+
subrange maxima reduction
merge results
acceptance analysis
maximum reduction
END
1026.6819.42
3-5
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
START
Final
Test
Procedure
check final parameters
prepare files
no
partial scans ?
yes
for all frequencies:
partial scans +
data reduction
no
complete search ?
yes
reset accessory
measure complete frq. set
and update accessory
data in results
merge results
accessory: next setting
no
all settings done ?
yes
for all frequencies:
set accessory (+ optional
adjustment) and measure with
final detector
END
1026.6819.42
3-6
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.1 Cable Calibration
3.1.1 Description
This test provides measuring cable transducers or any other system transducers (e.g. impedance
converters, preamplifiers, attenuators, filters, etc.). The main result of the test is a system transducer
table that can directly be used for level correction in the ES-K1 (scan/sweep tables).
The test can be performed with a scan or a sweep (plus data reduction), as well as on a given frequency
list.
Since the test represents a two-gate measurement, a scan or sweep table has to be used that activates
the tracking generator of the instrument; an "empty" (dummy) transducer (or simply "<none>") has to be
declared as the probe transducer. For scan tables it is recommended to use the average detector in
combination with a very small IF bandwidth.
For measurements on a frequency list (not with scans/sweeps) an external generator can be used as a
replacement for the tracking generator. This requires the option ES-K50 (Universal GPIB Driver).
If this option is installed, then the driver 'USER_IEC' can be added to the device list; the assigned to this
driver could be e.g. "GENERATOR" or the model name of the generator (e.g. "SMP"). The settings
should first be checked with the corresponding interactive dialog ("Set Device...").
In the script parameters of Topic "ExtGenerator" the device has to be selected and the appropriate
GPIB commands have to be entered.
The script parameters for the newer generators from R&S (SMxx) have to be set like this:
...
Topic
Calibration
Parameter:
Value:
04: scan table for measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
05: optional frequ. list for single measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
06: sweep table for measurements
<none>
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Value:
02: GPIB initialization command
"*RST;*CLS;POW -10DBM;FREQ:CW 1E9;OUTP1 ON"
Parameter:
Value:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"FREQ:CW %G"
Parameter:
Value:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1
...
...
1026.6819.42
3-7
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.1.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"cable_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
0.1
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Calibration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: result file (default: ID)
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the test (filetype is system transducer); if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: name of correction factor from reference meas.
"Cable Reference"
filename of a reference correction factor to be used for the test: if a reference
measurement shall be done, then the levels from the reference measurements
with the reference cable attached will be stored as a system transducer of the
given name, before the actual comparison test starts; any further tests - if run
under the same conditions - then can be performed without the reference
measurements (see next parameter) if the appropriate reference file is selected
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: create new reference factor (else use given factor)
checked
if checked then a reference measurement will be performed and stored as a
system transducer with the given name (see previous parameter);
else no reference measurements will be done but the selected system
transducer will be taken as the corresponding reference measurement result
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: scan table for measurements
"CAL"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the test
Parameter:
05: optional frequency list for single measurements
1026.6819.42
3-8
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"CAL"
filename of an optional frequency list to be used for single measurements; this
frequency list can be used only in combination with a scan table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: sweep table for measurements
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of results kept from scan/sweep
20
the number of results that shall be kept from a scan or sweep through data
reduction (if no single measurements according to a frequency list are done)
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
1026.6819.42
3-9
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Cable Calibration"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: cable name
"Cable"
a string that will be taken as the description of the test object; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
1026.6819.42
3-10
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: external generator device
"<none>"
symbolic name of the device for controlling of an external generator as defined
in the device configuration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GPIB initialization command
"RECALL 09"
GPIB command for the initialization of the external generator; it is recommended
to store the settings (fixed RF level, no modulation, etc.) in the memory of the
generator and to load them with this command
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"RF %G MHZ"
GPIB command for the setup of the RF frequency of the external generator; the
frequency - multiplied by the factor from the next parameter - will be inserted at
the position of the format string '%G'; variations for the format string are
possible as with the C function printf() or as described in the ES-K2 manual on
the script function convertf()
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1.0E-6
the frequency to be programmed is internally represented with the unit Hertz; the
frequency will be multiplied by this factor to enable a GPIB output in i.e. MHz
1026.6819.42
3-11
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.2 Probe Calibration
3.2.1 Description
This test provides measuring of the transducer factor of antennas or any other probes through a
comparing test with a probe of known transducer factor. The main result of the test is a probe
transducer table that can directly be used for level correction in the ES-K1 (scan/sweep tables).
The test can be performed with a scan or a sweep (plus data reduction), as well as on a given frequency
list.
For open area test site (OATS) measurements, the test should run using a frequency list that has been
modified so that any measurement of ambient signals will never happen.
Since the test represents a two-gate measurement, a scan or sweep table has to be used that activates
the tracking generator of the instrument; an "empty" (dummy) transducer (or simply "<none>") has to be
declared as the probe transducer. For scan tables it is recommended to use the average detector in
combination with a very small IF bandwidth.
Calibration of antennas is done best with vertical polarization and at a preferably high position (e.g. 4 m);
the antennas should be mounted in a way so that their axes match exactly.
For measurements on a frequency list (not with scans/sweeps) an external generator can be used as a
replacement for the tracking generator. This requires the option ES-K50 (Universal GPIB Driver).
If this option is installed, then the driver 'USER_IEC' can be added to the device list; the assigned to this
driver could be e.g. "GENERATOR" or the model name of the generator (e.g. "SMP"). The settings
should first be checked with the corresponding interactive dialog ("Set Device...").
In the script parameters of Topic "ExtGenerator" the device has to be selected and the appropriate
GPIB commands have to be entered.
The script parameters for the newer generators from R&S (SMxx) have to be set like this:
...
Topic
Calibration
Parameter:
Value:
04: scan table for measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
05: optional frequ. list for single measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
06: sweep table for measurements
<none>
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Value:
02: GPIB initialization command
"*RST;*CLS;POW -10DBM;FREQ:CW 1E9;OUTP1 ON"
Parameter:
Value:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"FREQ:CW %G"
Parameter:
Value:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1
...
...
1026.6819.42
3-12
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.2.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"probe_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
0.1
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
filename of a reference correction factor to be used for the test: if a reference
measurement shall be done, then the levels from the reference measurements
with the known probe will be stored as a system transducer of the given name,
before the actual comparison test starts; any further tests - if run under the
same conditions - then can be performed without the reference measurements
(see next parameter) if the appropriate reference file is selected
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Calibration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: result file (default: ID)
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the test (filetype is probe transducer); if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: name of correction factor from reference meas.
"Probe Reference"
filename of a reference correction factor to be used for the test: if a reference
measurement shall be done, then the levels from the reference measurements
with the known probe will be stored as a system transducer of the given name,
before the actual comparison test starts; any further tests - if run under the
same conditions - then can be performed without the reference measurements
(see next parameter) if the appropriate reference file is selected
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: create new reference factor (else: use given factor)
checked
if checked then a reference measurement will be performed and stored as a
system transducer with the given name (see previous parameter);
else no reference measurements will be done but the selected system
transducer will be taken as the corresponding reference measurement result
Parameter:
04: scan table for measurements
1026.6819.42
3-13
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"CAL"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: optional frequency list for single measurements
"CAL"
filename of an optional frequency list to be used for single measurements; this
frequency list can be used only in combination with a scan table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: sweep table for measurements
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of results kept from scan/sweep
20
the number of results that shall be kept from a scan or sweep through data
reduction (if no single measurements according to a frequency list are done)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: receive antenna reference probe transd. table
"<none>"
probe transducer to be used for the reference measurements (transducer
correction of the receiving antenna)
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
1026.6819.42
3-14
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Probe Calibration"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: probe name
"Probe"
a string that will be taken as the description of the test object; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
10: test specification
""
1026.6819.42
3-15
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
Mast
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna mast through dialogue boxes will
be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna mast will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved mast
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna mast as defined in
the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: antenna height [cm] for antenna mounting
100
defines the antenna height for mounting of the antenna (at the beginning and at
the end of the test, each time with horizontal polarization)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: antenna height [cm] for measurements
400
defines the antenna height for the measurements
Topic
Polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna polarization through dialogue
boxes will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna polarization will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. controlled polariz.
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna polarization as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
04: delay time [sec] for auto switching
4
1026.6819.42
3-16
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
defines a waiting time with automatic switching of the antenna polarization; the
delay time depends on the mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of
the antenna (the driver never gives a feedback when the switching has been
completed)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: measurements with horizontal polariz. only
not checked
if checked then the all measurements will be done with horizontal polarization
only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: measurements with vertical polariz. only
checked
if checked then the all measurements will be done with vertical polarization only
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: external generator device
"<none>"
symbolic name of the device for controlling of an external generator as defined
in the device configuration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GPIB initialization command
"RECALL 09"
GPIB command for the initialization of the external generator; it is recommended
to store the settings (fixed RF level, no modulation, etc.) in the memory of the
generator and to load them with this command
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"RF %G MHZ"
GPIB command for the setup of the RF frequency of the external generator; the
frequency - multiplied by the factor from the next parameter - will be inserted at
the position of the format string '%G'; variations for the format string are
possible as with the C function printf() or as described in the ES-K2 manual on
the script function convertf()
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1.0E-6
the frequency to be programmed is internally represented with the unit Hertz; the
frequency will be multiplied by this factor to enable a GPIB output in i.e. MHz
1026.6819.42
3-17
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.3 Site Attenuation
3.3.1 Description
This test provides measuring of the normalized site attenuation (NSA).
The test can be performed with a scan or a sweep (plus data reduction), as well as on a given frequency
list (also necessary for measurements with tuned dipoles).
For open area test site (OATS) measurements, the test should run with single measurements on a
frequency list that has been modified so that measurements of ambient signals will never happen.
With a spectrum analyzer in combination with broadband antennas, measurement is also possible
through continuous sweeps while the antenna captures the whole height range (as described in CISPR
16-1: "swept frequency method").
Since the test represents a two-gate measurement, a scan or sweep table has to be used that activates
the tracking generator of the instrument; an "empty" (dummy) transducer (or simply "<none>") has to be
declared as the probe transducer. The transducers tables of the transmit and receive antennas have to
be selected with the script parameters for each subrange (max. 5) of the scan/sweep table. For scan
tables it is recommended to use the average detector in combination with a very small IF bandwidth.
The ideal NSA is defined as a limit line; its name indicates the significant parameters of the test,
including antenna type (tuned half wave Dipole or Broadband), distance between antennas (3 / 10 / 30
m), height of the transmit antenna (1 / 1.5 / 2 / 2.7 m) and antenna polarization (horizontal or vertical).
Example:
"NSA B 10m h=1m ver" means
antenna type = broad band dipole
distance between antennas = 10 m
height of transmit antenna = 1 m
polarization of antennas = vertical
The following test setups are currently supported directly (see also CISPR 16, CISPR 22):
NSA B 3m h=2m hor
NSA B 3m h=1m ver
NSA B 3m h=1.5m ver
NSA B 10m
NSA B 10m
NSA B 10m
NSA B 10m
h=1m hor
h=2m hor
h=1m ver
h=1.5m ver
NSA B 30m h=1m hor
NSA B 30m h=2m hor
NSA B 30m h=1m ver
NSA D 3m h=2m hor
NSA D 3m h=2.7m ver
NSA D 10m h=2m hor
NSA D 10m h=2.7m ver
NSA D 30m h=2m hor
NSA D 30m h=2.7m ver
Optionally an additional correction (mutual impedance correction, defined as a system transducer) can
be used to compensate for the coupling effects of the antennas in the near field (so far the mutual
1026.6819.42
3-18
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
impedance correction is defined only for tuned dipoles antennas 3 m apart; see CISPR 16-1 and CISPR
22).
Example:
"CPL D 3m h=1m hor" means
antenna type = tuned half wave dipole
distance between antennas = 3 m
height of transmit antenna = 1 m
polarization of antennas = horizontal
To retrieve reference levels, a reference measurement will be done first for each subrange, which
means that the cables that are normally connected to the antennas have to be put directly together.
Once the reference levels have been stored (as a system transducer) they can be used again for further
NSA tests.
The names of the transducer tables that refer to the transmitting and to the receiving antennas have to
be specified for each (max. 5) range (of the scan / sweep table), as well as the stepsize for the height
variation of the receiving antenna.
The NSA will be displayed with two diagrams, one for the absolute representation of the ideal and the
measured NSA, and one for the relative representation of the measured NSA in comparison to the ideal
NSA.
The columns of the result list contain the following:
* frequency
* measured level
* measured reference level
* measured NSA
(measured level, corrected with reference level, mutual impedance correction and antenna
transducer corrections)
* ideal NSA
* deviation of the measured NSA from the ideal NSA
* antenna height of minimum attenuation (not with continuous sweeps during height variation)
For measurements on a frequency list (not with scans/sweeps) an external generator can be used as a
replacement for the tracking generator. This requires the option ES-K50 (Universal GPIB Driver).
If this option is installed, then the driver 'USER_IEC' can be added to the device list; the assigned to this
driver could be e.g. "GENERATOR" or the model name of the generator (e.g. "SMP"). The settings
should first be checked with the corresponding interactive dialog ("Set Device...").
In the script parameters of Topic "ExtGenerator" the device has to be selected and the appropriate
GPIB commands have to be entered.
The script parameters for the newer generators from R&S (SMxx) have to be set like this:
...
Topic
NSA
Parameter:
Value:
07: scan table for measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
08: optional frequ. list for single measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
10: sweep table for measurements
<none>
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Value:
02: GPIB initialization command
"*RST;*CLS;POW -10DBM;FREQ:CW 1E9;OUTP1 ON"
...
1026.6819.42
3-19
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Value:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"FREQ:CW %G"
Parameter:
Value:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1
...
1026.6819.42
3-20
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.3.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"site_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
NSA
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: NSA name (defined as limit line)
"<none>"
filename of the ideal NSA, defined as a limit line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: opt. mutual imped. correction (defined as system transd.)
"<none>"
filename of the optional mutual impedance correction to compensate for the
coupling effects of the antennas in the near field, defined as a system
transducer
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: result file (default: ID)
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the test (filetype is system transducer); if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range):
therefore it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the spectrum while
keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
05: name of correction factor from reference
"NSA Reference"
1026.6819.42
3-21
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
filename of the reference correction, stored as a system transducer:
if a reference measurement will be done, then first then before the actual NSA
test there will be measurements with the coaxial cables connected directly
together; these results will be stored as a system transducer so that any further
NSA tests can use these results - if the same cables are used - without another
reference measurement (see next parameter)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: create new reference factor (else: use given factor)
checked
if checked then a reference measurement will be performed and stored as a
system transducer with the given name (see previous parameter);
else no reference measurements will be done but the selected system
transducer will be taken as the corresponding reference measurement result
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: scan table for measurements
"NSA"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: opt. frequency list for single meas. mode
"NSA"
filename of an optional frequency list to be used for single measurements; this
frequency list can be used only in combination with a scan table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: tuned dipoles (with single meas. only)
not checked
if checked then with each new frequency the antenna will be put to horizontal
polarization, set to the lowest height and the required dipole length be displayed;
for measurements with vertical polarization the lowest position depends on the
length of the dipoles; this mode can be used only in combination with single
measurements based on a frequency list
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: sweep table for measurements
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: continuous sweeping (with sweep table only)
not checked
if checked then the antenna won't be moved step by step but continuously (and
preferably slowly) over the whole range (upwards + down) while new sweeps will
start all the time (see also CISPR 16-1: "swept frequency method"); this mode
can be used only in combination with a selected sweep table and represents the
fastest method although without information about corresponding antenna
heights
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: time [sec] for single measurements
1.0
a time that will be used for the single measurements based on a frequency list,
regardless of the setting in the scan table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: NSA tolerance [dB]
4.0
tolerance level for the maximum deviation of the measured NSA from the ideal
NSA (parameter will be used with a later version)
Parameter:
Default value:
14: no. of results kept from scan/sweep per range
20
1026.6819.42
3-22
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
the number of results that shall be kept from a scan or sweep through data
reduction (if no single measurements according to a frequency list are done)
Topic
Antennas
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: 1st range: transmit antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the transmit antenna to be used for the 1st
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 1st range: receive antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the receive antenna to be used for the 1st
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st range: height step size [cm]
20
stepsize for the antenna movements to be used for the 1st subrange of the
scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd range: transmit antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the transmit antenna to be used for the 2nd
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: 2nd range: receive antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the receive antenna to be used for the 2nd
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: 2nd range: height step size [cm]
10
stepsize for the antenna movements to be used for the 2nd subrange of the
scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: 3rd range: transmit antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the transmit antenna to be used for the 3rd
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: 3rd range: receive antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the receive antenna to be used for the 3rd
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: 3rd range: height step size [cm]
5
stepsize for the antenna movements to be used for the 3rd subrange of the
scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: 4th range: transmit antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the transmit antenna to be used for the 4th
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
11: 4th range: receive antenna probe transd. table
1026.6819.42
3-23
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the receive antenna to be used for the 4th
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 4th range: height step size [cm]
5
stepsize for the antenna movements to be used for the 4th subrange of the
scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: 5th range: transmit antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the transmit antenna to be used for the 5th
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: 5th range: receive antenna probe transd. table
"<none>"
filename of the transducer table of the receive antenna to be used for the 5th
subrange of the scan/sweep table
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: 5th range: height step size [cm]
5
stepsize for the antenna movements to be used for the 5th subrange of the
scan/sweep table
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: 1st graphics config., <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test (absolute
representation); if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd graphics config., <none>: ID + '_rel'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test (relative
representation); if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
1026.6819.42
3-24
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Site Attenuation"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: NSA name
"NSA ..."
a string that will be taken as the description of the test object; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
1026.6819.42
3-25
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
Mast
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna mast through dialogue boxes will
be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna mast will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved mast
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna mast as defined in
the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: min. height [cm] to be measured
100
defines the minimum mast height for the measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. height [cm] to be measured
400
defines the maximum mast height for the measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: speed value for movements
4
defines the speed of the mast movements:
faster for absolute positioning, slower for continuous sweeps
Topic
Polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna polarization through dialogue
boxes will be used
1026.6819.42
3-26
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna polarization will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. controlled polariz.
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna polarization as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: delay time [sec] for auto switching
4
defines a waiting time with automatic switching of the antenna polarization; the
delay time depends on the mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of
the antenna (the driver never gives a feedback when the switching has been
completed)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: measurements with horizontal polariz. only
not checked
if checked then the all measurements will be done with horizontal polarization
only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: measurements with vertical polariz. only
checked
if checked then the all measurements will be done with vertical polarization only
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: external generator device
"<none>"
symbolic name of the device for controlling of an external generator as defined
in the device configuration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GPIB initialization command
"RECALL 09"
GPIB command for the initialization of the external generator; it is recommended
to store the settings (fixed RF level, no modulation, etc.) in the memory of the
generator and to load them with this command
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"RF %G MHZ"
GPIB command for the setup of the RF frequency of the external generator; the
frequency - multiplied by the factor from the next parameter - will be inserted at
the position of the format string '%G'; variations for the format string are
possible as with the C function printf() or as described in the ES-K2 manual on
the script function convertf()
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1.0E-6
the frequency to be programmed is internally represented with the unit Hertz; the
frequency will be multiplied by this factor to enable a GPIB output in i.e. MHz
1026.6819.42
3-27
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.4 Overview Test
3.4.1 Description
This test consists of a preview test (scan or sweep) as well as an automatic and/or a manual data
reduction (for finding critical frequencies).
The automatic data reduction works as with other standard scripts.
With the manual data reduction the user can select suspect frequencies with the marker from the
spectrum of the preview test and add these to a list. In addition, either a partial scan or a partial sweep
can be run around these frequencies, thus improving the accuracy of the frequencies.
It is a good idea to define the scan/sweep table such that a continuous repetition will occur. If any
accessory dialogs (e.g. for a LISN or an automatic antenna mast) then these devices can be controlled
al over the test, i.e. the user himself does the maximization through varying of the accessories.
1026.6819.42
3-28
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.4.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"ovw_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
1026.6819.42
3-29
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional input: preview result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing preview
result file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for PK or for
st
nd
PK+AV) or optionally two (e.g. 1 for PK, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: optional input: preview result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: perform manual (interactive) data reduction
not checked
if checked then you can select and review the critical points (also those that
have been found through the automatic data reduction if also the next parameter
is activated), i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the test;. to do so
you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove" or "Test" in a
dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: perform automatic data reduction
not checked
if checked then an automatic data reduction will be performed; if the previous
parameter is also activated then the manual data reduction will be done after the
automatic one
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st limit line
"<none>"
st
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 1 detector (e.g.
1026.6819.42
3-30
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 1st acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
st
reduction of the preview results from the 1 detector; if used then the given
value for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: optional 2nd limit line
"<none>"
nd
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 2 detector (e.g.
AVERAGE)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional 2nd acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
nd
reduction of preview results from the 2 detector; if used then the given value
for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: freq. list of ambients to be cut out from preview
"<none>"
optional name of a frequency list (ambient interference) with frequencies to be
"cut out" from measurement results (preview test: scans/sweeps, final test:
partial scans), each "cut" with a range corresponding to the current IF
bandwidth, e.g. +/- 60 kHz around each of the frequencies if an IF bandwidth of
120 kHz is used; to blank a modulated interference it might be necessary to
provide more than one frequency in the list
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: cutting width for sweeps (ambients): no. of IF-BWs
10
with sweeps the width of a "cut" range (see previous parameter) has to be larger
because of the lower frequency resolution of the results; therefore this factor
(=number of IF bandwidths) will be used to enlarge the range compared with the
range used on scan results
Topic
Monitor
1026.6819.42
3-31
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
filename of the scan table to be used for partial scans; this parameter cannot be
used together with the next parameter; to observe the spectrum more easily it is
recommended to define a scan table with continuous repetitions;
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: sweep table for partial sweeps
"<none>"
filename of the sweep table to be used for partial sweeps; this parameter cannot
be used together with the previous parameter; to observe the spectrum more
easily it is recommended to define a sweep table with continuous repetitions;
note that partial sweeps only give back a very small number of measurement
points, e.g. a 1% portion of the frequency range as defined in the sweep table
range will result in 1% of the sweep trace points only; this is due to a conceptual
limitation to the handling of sweep trace data; the situation can be improved
through a sweep table which is defined with many ranges so that a partial sweep
still covers more than only a small fraction of the corresponding sweep range of
the selected table; alternatively use partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: partial scan/sweep width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans/sweeps expressed in multiples
of the IF bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0
then the calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: partial scan/sweep width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans/sweeps (e.g. 0.01 means +/0.5 %) in reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if
the previous parameter is set to 0
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin PK'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. QUASIPEAK) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
1026.6819.42
3-32
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Overview"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
1026.6819.42
3-33
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
1026.6819.42
3-34
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.5 Semi Interactive Test
3.5.1 Description
An open area test site (OATS) is normally not suitable for automatic tests because of the many ambient
disturbances. In this case the operator has to find out (e.g. through switching the EuT off and on if
possible or by looking at / listening to the signal) whether the field strength generated by the EuT is
above the limit, but sometimes this can be impossible, when the ambient disturbance exceeds the limit.
This test provides interactive single measurements plus protocolling, controlled from a special dialog:
By clicking Down and Up the
arbitrarily editable frequency will be
decreased and increased by the
step size defined in the scan table.
If the test is based on a frequency
list or on a measurement result list
then with Previous and Next the
dialogue will switch to the
corresponding frequency. With
measurement results the referring
positions of the antenna and the
EuT can optionally be set. A click
on the button Marker will copy the
marker frequency of the currently active graphics diagram (if it has the marker activated).
The buttons Partial Sweep and Partial Scan start measurements to watch the spectrum around the
current frequency if suitable range tables are selected with the script parameters. If those range tables
are defined with continuous repetitions then also variations in the
spectrum can be observed (e.g. while moving the antenna). The
resulting curve(s) will be shown in an extra window with the marker
activated so that the maximum of the curve can easily be retrieved. The
width of the partial scan or sweep can be defined in the field 'Range
Width'.
Through activating one of the measurement detectors (Measure Peak /
Quasipeak / RMS / Average) a single measurement will be started,
using the given values for measurement time ('Meas.Time' in seconds)
and for IF filter bandwidth ('IF Bandwidth' in kHz). The level will be
displayed both digitally in the dialogue (current and maximum value) and
as an analog bar. The analog bar display which can also be seen from a
distance will adapt its "operating range" to the current level value. As
soon as the maximum has been found, the result (the maximum level)
along with a short text ('Comment') can be saved by pressing Store. For
each of the detectors there will be one measurement result file which
also holds information about the limit and optionally about the settings of
mast and turntable.
If the EuT can be remotely switched then by pressing EuT on and EuT off a line of the parallel port
(device driver LPT I/O) can be used as a TTL control signal; this feature enhances the identification of
interference signals on an OATS.
1026.6819.42
3-35
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.5.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"semi_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: frequency list to be used (if next param is NONE)
"<none>"
optional name of a frequency list with frequencies on which the test shall be
based; the list might hold critical frequencies that have been entered manually or
have been the output of a data reduction; this frequency list won't be used if a
measurement result list is selected with the next parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: measurement result to be used
"<none>"
optional name of a measurement result list with frequencies on which the test
shall be based; the list might hold results that have been the output of a data
reduction or of an automatic test; if this result list also holds information
(columns) about mast and turntable settings, then parameter Final 09 will make
the script use these data for positioning mast and turntable accordingly
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: file for PEAK results, <none>: ID + '_fin PK'
"<none>"
optional filename for the PEAK results from the data reduction; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: file for QUASIPEAK results, <none>: ID + '_fin QP'
"<none>"
optional filename for the QUASIPEAK results from the data reduction; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
03: file for AVERAGE results, <none>: ID + '_fin AV'
1026.6819.42
3-36
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
optional filename for the AVERAGE results from the data reduction; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: file for RMS results, <none>: ID + '_fin RMS'
"<none>"
optional filename for the RMS results from the data reduction; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: scan table for single measurements
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for single measurements; the
settings will be loaded and then modified according to the settings of the
dialogue (detector, IF bandwidth and measurement time)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for partial scans; to observe the
spectrum more easily it is recommended to define a scan table with continuous
repetitions
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: sweep table for partial sweeps
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for partial sweeps; to observe the
spectrum more easily it is recommended to define a sweep table with
continuous repetitions;
note that partial sweeps only give back a very small number of measurement
points, e.g. a 1% portion of the frequency range as defined in the sweep table
range will result in 1% of the sweep trace points only; this is due to a conceptual
limitation to the handling of sweep trace data; the situation can be improved
through a sweep table which is defined with many ranges so that a partial sweep
still covers more than only a small fraction of the corresponding sweep range of
the selected table; alternatively use partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: use/store field mast/turntable data if available
not checked
if checked then any information about mast/turntable positions will be used
(measurement result list as a basis for the test, see parameter Test 06); those
positions will be directly set each time when a frequency is selected (previous or
next); besides, the current positions will be stored in the result files of the test
Topic
Limits
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: optional PEAK limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to an optional limit line for the PEAK detector; if
selected then the result file that corresponds to the detector will also show the
values of the limit and the margin
1026.6819.42
3-37
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional QUASIPEAK limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to an optional limit line for the QUASIPEAK
detector; if selected then the result file that corresponds to the detector will also
show the values of the limit and the margin
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
AVERAGE
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to an optional limit line for the AVERAGE detector;
if selected then the result file that corresponds to the detector will also show the
values of the limit and the margin
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional RMS limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to an optional limit line for the RMS detector; if
selected then the result file that corresponds to the detector will also show the
values of the limit and the margin
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: range of the analog level bar display [dBxx]
40
defines the display range of the analogue level display; as soon as the level
comes closer than 5 dB to one end of the display range then the range will be
shifted accordingly by 10 dB
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
1026.6819.42
3-38
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Semi Interactive Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
1026.6819.42
3-39
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
SwitchEUT
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: symbolic name of autom. EuT switch
"LPTIO"
symbolic device name of the CENTRONICS parallel I/O interface driver as
defined in the device configuration menu; one output line will be used as a TTL
control line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: LPT I/O output pin no. (1-9)
2
defines an output line (connector pin no. 1 - 9) of the parallel port as the control
line for automatic switching of the EuT
Topic
Mast
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna mast through dialogue boxes will
be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna mast will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved mast
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna mast as defined in
the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: speed value for movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved mast
Topic
Turntable
1026.6819.42
3-40
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the turntable through dialogue boxes will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the turntable will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved turntable
"TURNTABLE"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled turntable as defined in the
device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: speed value for faster movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved turntable
Topic
Polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna polarization through dialogue
boxes will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna polarization will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. controlled polariz.
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna polarization as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: delay time [sec] for auto switching
4
defines a waiting time with automatic switching of the antenna polarization; the
delay time depends on the mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of
the antenna (the driver never gives a feedback when the switching has been
completed)
1026.6819.42
3-41
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.6 Power Test
3.6.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of electromagnetic interference (power) using a power
absorbing clamp moved along the mains cable, optionally with control of a slidebar for moving the clamp
automatically.
The exact positions for the clamp settings will be calculated from the actual start and stop frequencies of
the active test range through a simple but very effective algorithm (position step size depends on highest
frequency, maximum position depends on lowest frequency).
With test receivers the preview test (for finding the relevant frequencies) is normally done with the
absorbing clamp in the zero position, which means very close to the equipment under test (EuT); with
that position all critical frequencies should show up, but not necessarily with the maximum level that
might be detected at an other position.
If the test chamber is not shielded properly then ambient signals might find their way into the long mains
cable. The software can help: An optional frequency list with ambients can be used to cut out for each
frequency a range one IF bandwidth wide that won't be further analyzed; of course this method has its
problems if one or more frequencies of ambient interference are identical to those critical ones of the
EuT
If needed, an auxiliary switch can be used for additional switching (extra shielding, different operation
modes, etc.), currently with the states ON and OFF only; if activated, an extra column, holding the state
of that switch, will be added to the results. If both states are defined for searching, then this will double
the number of states to be analyzed.
3.6.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55014
Frequency Range:
Detectors:
Test Samples:
1026.6819.42
30 - 300 MHz
QP and AV
Household Equipment
3-42
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.6.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"pow_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
300
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 08 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-43
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2 preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: complete search (all accessory settings)
not checked
if checked sweeps/scans will be done on all clamp settings as specified with
clamp parameters for the preview test (recommended for preview tests with
sweeps, e.g. with an EMI analyzer);
else only one sweep/scans will be done with one fixed setting as specified with
clamp parameters for the preview test (recommended for preview tests with
scans, e.g. with an EMI test receiver)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 1st limit line
"<none>"
st
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 1 detector (e.g.
QUASIPEAK)
1026.6819.42
nd
3-44
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 2nd limit line
"<none>"
nd
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 2 detector (e.g.
AVERAGE)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: freq. list of ambients to be cut out from preview
"<none>"
optional name of a frequency list (ambient interference) with frequencies to be
"cut out" from measurement results (preview test: scans/sweeps, final test:
partial scans), each "cut" with a range corresponding to the current IF
bandwidth, e.g. +/- 60 kHz around each of the frequencies if an IF bandwidth of
120 kHz is used; to blank a modulated interference it might be necessary to
provide more than one frequency in the list
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: cutting width for sweeps (ambients): no. of IF-BWs
10
with sweeps the width of a "cut" range (see previous parameter) has to be larger
because of the lower frequency resolution of the results; therefore this factor
(=number of IF bandwidths) will be used to enlarge the range compared with the
range used on scan results
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: merge all points from both detectors into same list
not checked
if checked then the points that have been found through the automatic data
reduction from both detectors will be merged into one single list which in turn will
be used for both detectors in the final test
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. QUASIPEAK) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
1026.6819.42
3-45
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans + maximization
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: complete search (all accessory settings)
checked
determines the search mode for the preview test: complete search means that
measurements will be done on all clamp settings as specified with clamp
parameters for the final test (recommended when the preview test has been
performed with a fixed setting of the clamp);
else: measurements will be done on those clamp settings that were determined
through a "complete search" in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: perform accessory adjustment
checked
if checked then an additional search (in a small range) for the (local) maximum
level will be performed with the absorbing clamp; this is recommended, if the
preview test was performed with only one or a small number of clamp positions
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: adjustment full range
not checked
if an additional search for the maximum level will be performed then not a small
range will be analyzed but the full positioning range of the absorbing clamp
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
1026.6819.42
3-46
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: optional input: preview result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing preview
result file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for PK or
PK+AV) or optionally two (e.g. 1st for PK, 2nd for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: optional input: preview result file (2 det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
16: optional input: frequency list
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or QP+AV) or
optionally two (e.g. 1st for QP, 2nd for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
17: optional input: frequency list (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
18: optional input: final result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing final result
file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or QP+AV) or
optionally two (e.g. 1st for QP, 2nd for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
19: optional input: final result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
1026.6819.42
nd
3-47
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: split result display
not checked
if checked then the results will be displayed with two graphics:
the first shows the PEAK and QUASIPEAK results and the QUASIPEAK limit
line;
the second shows the AVERAGE results and the AVERAGE limit line;
the name of the second diagram is based on the first one's plus "_2" appended
to it
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
1026.6819.42
3-48
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Power Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
1026.6819.42
3-49
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
time of the test will be entered
Topic
Clamp
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the absorbing clamp through dialogue boxes
will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the absorbing clamp will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved clamp
"CLAMP"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled absorbing clamp as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: speed value for slower movements
2
determines the speed of the automatically moved clamp for the relatively slow
movements for the "adjustment" in the final test (some 1 or 2 measurements per
sec. only !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: speed value for faster movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved clamp for the relatively fast
movements for absolute positioning
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: fixed/max. length [cm] to be measured (preview)
500
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: determines the maximum length to be used for
measurements
initial setting only: position to be used for measurements (normally 0 cm)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of steps per shortest half wave length (preview)
3
determines the number of steps that shall be measured within the first half wave
of the highest frequency (of the current test range), with steadily increasing
stepsize for greater distances, e.g.:
a test 60 - 200 MHz, 3 steps per shortest half wave length:
=> 3 steps within 75 cm (half wave length at 200 MHz)
=> ever increasing steps (factor is 1 + 1/3) up to 250 cm
(= half wave length at 60 MHz)
=> positions: 0 / 25 / 50 / 75 / 100 / 133 / 177 / 237 / 250 cm
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: max. length [cm] to be measured (finals)
500
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the maximum distance of the absorbing
clamp to be used for measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
09: no. of steps per shortest half wave length (finals)
3
1026.6819.42
3-50
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
determines the number of steps that shall be measured within the first half wave
of the highest frequency (of the current test range), with steadily increasing
stepsize for greater distances, see example above (parameter Clamp 07)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: no. of steps as adjustment range (finals)
1
final test with "adjustment":
determines the number of steps that shall be taken as a position range for the
adjustment of the clamp
Topic
Auxiliary
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual auxiliary switching
not checked
if checked then manual control of an auxiliary switch through dialogue boxes will
be used; if activated an extra column, holding the state ("ON" or "OFF") of the
switch will be added to the results
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: name of auxiliary device
"Auxiliary Device"
name of the auxiliary switch (will be displayed with the dialog boxes for
switching)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: preview measurements with aux. switch OFF
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the state
"OFF"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: preview measurements with aux. switch ON
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the state
"ON"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: final measurements with aux. switch OFF
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the state "OFF"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: final measurements with aux. switch ON
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the state "ON"
1026.6819.42
3-51
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.7 Voltage Mains Test
3.7.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of electromagnetic interference on supply lines, optionally
with automatic control of an artificial mains network (LISN).
Depending on the kind of LISN, the parameters have to be set:
with a single line LISN measurements are normally done on a number of (AC or DC) supply
lines; switching between lines has to be done manually
with a 2-line LISN like the ESH3-Z5 switching can be done automatically between lines N and
L1, protective earth between grounded floating (with ENV 216: high pass setting)
with a 4-line LISN like the ESH2-Z5 switching can be done automatically between lines N, L1,
L2 and L3, protective earth between grounded floating (not with ENV 4200)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
With test receivers the preview test (for finding the critical frequencies) is normally done on a single
setting of the LISN (e.g. phase L1 with the protective earth floating).
The artificial mains networks ESH2-Z5 and ESH3-Z5 are normally controlled via the user port of the
receiver. With this test procedure the parallel interface can alternatively be defined for controlling, using
the LPT I/O driver. When doing so, the lines of the parallel port will be used as follows:
DATA 0 (Pin No. 2): N
DATA 1 (Pin No. 3): L1
DATA 2 (Pin No. 4):
L2 (ESH2-Z5 only)
DATA 3 (Pin No. 5): L3 (ESH2-Z5 only)
DATA 4 (Pin No. 6): PE for ESH2-Z5
DATA 5 (Pin No. 7): PE for ESH3-Z5
If needed, an auxiliary switch can be used for additional switching (extra shielding, different operation
modes, etc.), currently with the states ON and OFF only; if activated, an extra column, holding the state
of that switch, will be added to the results. If both states are defined for searching, then this will double
the number of states to be analyzed.
3.7.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55015
Frequency Range:
Detectors:
Test Samples:
0.15 - 30 MHz
QP and AV
Fluorescent Lamps and Luminaries
EN 55022
Frequency Range:
Detectors:
Test Samples:
0.15 - 30 MHz
QP and AV
ITE: Class B
1026.6819.42
3-52
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.7.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"vol_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
0.15
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 08 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-53
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2 preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview (N)
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: opt. scan table for preview on LISN line L1
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for the preview test to be used only
when measurements are done on line L1; if used then the first scan range table
will only be used with measurements on line N
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: opt. scan table for preview on LISN line L2
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for the preview test to be used only
when measurements are done on line L2
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: opt. scan table for preview on LISN line L3
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for the preview test to be used only
when measurements are done on line L3
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: sweep table for preview (N)
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: opt. sweep table for preview on LISN line L1
"<none>"
filename of an additional sweep range table for the preview test to be used only
when measurements are done on line L1; if used then the first sweep range
table will only be used with measurements on line N
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: opt. sweep table for preview on LISN line L2
"<none>"
filename of an additional sweep range table for the preview test to be used only
when measurements are done on line L2
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10 opt. sweep table for preview on LISN line L3
"<none>"
filename of an additional sweep range table for the preview test to be used only
when measurements are done on line L3
1026.6819.42
nd
3-54
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 1st limit line
"<none>"
st
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 1 detector (e.g.
QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 2nd limit line
"<none>"
nd
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 2 detector (e.g.
AVERAGE)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: merge all points from both detectors into same list
not checked
if checked then the points that have been found through the automatic data
reduction from both detectors will be merged into one single list which in turn will
be used for both detectors in the final test
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. QUASIPEAK) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
1026.6819.42
3-55
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans + maximization (N)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: opt. scan table for partial scans + max. (L1)
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for maximization measurements and
for partial scans to be used only when measurements are done on line L1; if
used then the first scan range table will only be used with measurements on line
N
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: opt. scan table for partial scans + max. (L2)
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for maximization measurements and
for partial scans to be used only when measurements are done on line L2
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: opt. scan table for partial scans + max. (L3)
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for maximization measurements and
for partial scans to be used only when measurements are done on line L3
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
11: complete search
checked
1026.6819.42
3-56
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
determines the search mode for the preview test: complete search means that
measurements will be done on all LISN(/AUX) settings as specified with
LISN(/AUX) parameters for the final test (recommended for final tests, when the
preview test has not been performed as "complete search"; normally with EMI
test receivers); use LISN(/AUX) data means that measurements will be done on
those LISN(/AUX) settings that were determined through a "complete search" in
the preview test (normally with EMI analyzers)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: scan table for final measurements (N)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: opt. scan table for final measurements (L1)
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for the final measurements to be
used only when measurements are done on line L1; if used then the first scan
range table will only be used with measurements on line N
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: opt. scan table for final measurements (L2)
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for the final measurements to be
used only when measurements are done on line L2
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: opt. scan table for final measurements (L3)
"<none>"
filename of an additional scan range table for the final measurements to be
used only when measurements are done on line L3
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
16: QP limit relaxation according to FCC
not checked
st
if checked then every final measurement with the 1 detector will be extended
through an additional measurement with the AVERAGE detector; should the
QUASIPEAK level then be more than 6 dB above the AVERAGE level, then we
have a broadband signal; as a consequence the QUASIPEAK limit will be
increased (relaxed) by 13 dB as described in the FCC standard
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
17: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
18: optional input: preview result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing preview
result file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for PK or for
st
nd
PK+AV) or optionally two (e.g. 1 for PK, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
19: optional input: preview result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
20: optional input: frequency list
1026.6819.42
3-57
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or for QP+AV)
st
nd
or optionally two (e.g. 1 for QP, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
21: optional input: frequency list (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
22: optional input: final result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing final result
file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or for QP+AV)
st
nd
or optionally two (e.g. 1 for QP, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
23: optional input: final result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: split result display
not checked
if checked then the results will be displayed with two graphics:
the first shows the PEAK and QUASIPEAK results and the QUASIPEAK limit
line;
the second shows the AVERAGE results and the AVERAGE limit line;
the name of the second diagram is based on the first one's plus "_2" appended
to it
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
1026.6819.42
3-58
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Voltage Mains Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
1026.6819.42
3-59
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
LISN
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the artificial mains network (LISN) through
dialogue boxes will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the artificial mains network (LISN) will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: use LPT I/O switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the artificial mains network (LISN) via the
driver LPT I/O will be used; in this case the lines of the parallel port will be used
as follows:
DATA 0 (Pin No. 2): N
DATA 1 (Pin No. 3): L1
DATA 2 (Pin No. 4): L2 (ESH2-Z5 only)
DATA 3 (Pin No. 5): L3 (ESH2-Z5 only)
DATA 4 (Pin No. 6): PE for ESH2-Z5
DATA 5 (Pin No. 7): PE for ESH3-Z5
1026.6819.42
3-60
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: symbolic device name of autom. switched LISN
"ESH2-Z2"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled artificial mains network as
defined in the device configuration menu; the device properties must match with
the controlling device (e.g. IEEE command strings for an EMI test receiver)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: single line LISN
not checked
if checked then a single-line-LISN for measurements on a number of supply
lines is assumed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: sgl.: no. of lines to be measured for preview
0
specifies the number of lines to be analyzed in the preview test, if a single-lineLISN is used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: sgl.: no. of lines to be measured for finals
0
specifies the number of lines to be analyzed in the final test, if a single-line-LISN
is used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: preview measurements with PE floating
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the
protective earth floating
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: preview measurements with PE grounded
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the
protective earth grounded
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: preview measurements on line N
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done on the neutral line
N
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: preview measurements on line L1
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done on the line L1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: preview measurements on line L2
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done on the line L2
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: preview measurements on line L3
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done on the line L3
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: final measurements with PE floating
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the protective
earth floating
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: final measurements with PE grounded
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the protective
1026.6819.42
3-61
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
earth grounded
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
16: final measurements on line N
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done on the neutral line N
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
17: final measurements on line L1
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done on the line L1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
18: final measurements on line L2
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done on the line L2
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
19: final measurements on line L3
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done on the line L3
Topic
Auxiliary
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual auxiliary switching
not checked
if checked then manual control of an auxiliary switch through dialogue boxes will
be used; if activated an extra column, holding the state ("ON" or "OFF") of the
switch will be added to the results
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: name of auxiliary device
"Auxiliary Device"
name of the auxiliary switch (will be displayed with the dialog boxes for
switching)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: preview measurements with aux. switch OFF
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the state
"OFF"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: preview measurements with aux. switch ON
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the state
"ON"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: final measurements with aux. switch OFF
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the state "OFF"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: final measurements with aux. switch ON
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the state "ON"
1026.6819.42
3-62
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.8 Voltage Terminal Test
3.8.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of conducted electromagnetic interference on the antenna
terminals of TV sets, VCRs and radios.
The test starts with a preview test to look for critical frequencies while the tuner is in a "channel search
mode". If there are any of them (ambient signals can optionally be cut out according to a frequency list),
then the user can decide whether to continue testing with test signals. In that case (a power divider will
be required and the signal loss has to be defined as a system transducer for the sweep/scan tables) the
critical frequencies will be analyzed to find the corresponding channel (IF will be subtracted and a
frequency list with channel width information will be used):
A message will come up to provide a test signal (channel + carrier frequency) for the (next) required
channel. The oscillator frequency and all harmonic frequencies within the test range will be evaluated
against the matching limit. Then these frequencies will be cut out from the spectrum and the rest will be
evaluated against the limit that is defined for "other" signals. The procedure will be repeated for all
critical frequencies from the preview test. In the test report for all QP measurements (if level is above
the acceptance line) a note will indicate the signal type and the corresponding carrier frequency.
Without QP measurements, the list with the critical points from the preview test (PK results) will be
shown in the test report.
3.8.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specification is supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55013
Frequency Range:
Detectors:
Test Samples:
1026.6819.42
0.15 - 30 MHz
QP and AV
Television Sets, FM Tuners, VCRs, DVD Players, etc.
3-63
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.8.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"vterm_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: frequency list with channel info
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-64
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
defines the channel list to be used in the test, a frequency list which also holds
information like channel names and channel widths
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: measurement of wanted signals (ignore IF offset)
not checked
if checked then the test is configured for the measurement of "wanted signals"
(e.g. for measuring VCRs or DVD players): the value of the tuner IF offset will be
ignored and the carrier will not be cut off the spectrum
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: all/others limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required limit line for all "other" (not
fundamental and harmonic) frequencies (e.g. a QUASIPEAK limit)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: fundamentals limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required limit line for the oscillator's
fundamental frequencies (e.g. a QUASIPEAK limit)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: harmonics limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required limit line for the oscillator's harmonic
frequencies (e.g. a QUASIPEAK limit)
Parameter:
04: max. no. of results kept per testrange
1026.6819.42
3-65
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each testrange through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: frequency list of ambients to be cut out of from preview
"<none>"
optional name of a frequency list (ambient interference) with frequencies to be
"cut out" from measurement results (preview test: scans/sweeps, final test:
partial scans), each "cut" with a range corresponding to the current IF
bandwidth, e.g. +/- 60 kHz around each of the frequencies if an IF bandwidth of
120 kHz is used; to blank a modulated interference it might be necessary to
provide more than one frequency in the list
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: cut factor for sweeps (ambients+osc.+har.)
10
with sweeps the width of a "cut" range has to be larger because of the lower
frequency resolution of the results; therefore this factor (=number of IF
bandwidths) will be used to enlarge the range compared with the range used on
scan results
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
optional filename for the (QUASIPEAK) results from the final test; if no filename
is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2
"<none>"
optional filename for the (PEAK) results from the final test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for meas. with carrier on
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the final test, when a carrier
signal is present
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: sweep table for meas. with carrier on
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the final test, when a carrier
signal is present
Parameter:
Default value:
05: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-66
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: optional input: preview result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing preview
result file can be specified as an input for the final test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: optional input: frequency list
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: optional input: final result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing final result
file can be specified as an input for the final test
1026.6819.42
3-67
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
1026.6819.42
3-68
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Voltage Terminal Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
1026.6819.42
3-69
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.9 Azimuth Chart Test
3.9.1 Description
With this test the radiation pattern of an EuT as well as the azimuth pattern of an antenna can be
measured and be displayed in a polar chart.
For gaining the radiation pattern of an EuT, the device has to be mounted onto a turntable.
The azimuth pattern of an antenna can be retrieved by turning the (receiving) antenna (optionally with a
turntable) while transmitting antenna - e.g. mounted on a tripod - radiates with a constant level (provided
by the tracking generator of the receiver). Maximum eight frequencies will be measured with each
azimuth step. The measured levels will be stored along with the azimuths an displayed in a polar
diagram (level against azimuth; one curve per frequency). The display of the levels may be either
absolute or relative to the levels of the main azimuth (an offset can be defined); the levels of the main
azimuth can be stored as a reference so that with another test they can be used for a relative display.
For measurements on a frequency list (not with scans/sweeps) an external generator can be used as a
replacement for the tracking generator. This requires the option ES-K50 (Universal GPIB Driver).
If this option is installed, then the driver 'USER_IEC' can be added to the device list; the assigned to this
driver could be e.g. "GENERATOR" or the model name of the generator (e.g. "SMP"). The settings
should first be checked with the corresponding interactive dialog ("Set Device...").
In the script parameters of Topic "ExtGenerator" the device has to be selected and the appropriate
GPIB commands have to be entered.
The script parameters for the newer generators from R&S (SMxx) have to be set like this:
...
Topic
Calibration
Parameter:
Value:
04: scan table for measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
05: optional frequ. list for single measurements
[must be selected!]
Parameter:
Value:
06: sweep table for measurements
<none>
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Value:
02: GPIB initialization command
"*RST;*CLS;POW -10DBM;FREQ:CW 1E9;OUTP1 ON"
Parameter:
Value:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"FREQ:CW %G"
Parameter:
Value:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1
...
...
1026.6819.42
3-70
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.9.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"chart_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: frequ. list for single measurements
"CAL"
frequency with the frequencies to be measured; only the first eight frequencies
within the given and available frequency range will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: main azimuth [deg] (used as azimuth offset)
0
defines the main azimuth; the value will be used as an offset for the results
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: relative display
not checked
if checked then the levels will be calculated relatively either to the main azimuth
or to the loaded reference
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: name of reference results to be used
""
name of the reference file (stored as a transducer) which shall be used for the
relative display of the levels
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: name of reference results to be stored
""
name of the reference file which holds the levels of the main azimuth (will be
stored as a transducer)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Measurement
Parameter:
Default value:
01: scan table for single measurements
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-71
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
filename of the scan range table to be used for the (single) measurements
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: minimum level
0
defines the minimum level of the polar graphics diagram
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: maximum level
80
defines the maximum level of the polar graphics diagram
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
1026.6819.42
3-72
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Azimuth Chart"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
1026.6819.42
3-73
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Topic
Turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the turntable through dialogue boxes will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the turntable will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved turntable
"TURNTABLE"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled turntable as defined in the
device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: min. azimuth [deg]
0
defines the minimum azimuth for the measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. azimuth [deg]
360
defines the maximum azimuth for the measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: azimuth stepsize [deg] for finals
45
defines the stepsize for the azimuth variation
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: speed value for positioning movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: use continuous movements
not checked
if checked then the turntable will not be moved in steps but will rotate
continuously while the single measurements are being performed and stored
along with their current azimuth; the azimuth steps are somewhat random
because they depend on the measurement time and the turntable speed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: speed value for continuous movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved turntable for continuous
movements
Topic
ExtGenerator
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: external generator device
"<none>"
symbolic name of the device for controlling of an external generator as defined
in the device configuration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GPIB initialization command
"RECALL 09"
GPIB command for the initialization of the external generator; it is recommended
1026.6819.42
3-74
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
to store the settings (fixed RF level, no modulation, etc.) in the memory of the
generator and to load them with this command
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GPIB frequ. command incl. format string
"RF %G MHZ"
GPIB command for the setup of the RF frequency of the external generator; the
frequency - multiplied by the factor from the next parameter - will be inserted at
the position of the format string '%G'; variations for the format string are
possible as with the C function printf() or as described in the ES-K2 manual on
the script function convertf()
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: frequency factor (e.g. 1E-6 for MHz)
1.0E-6
the frequency to be programmed is internally represented with the unit Hertz; the
frequency will be multiplied by this factor to enable a GPIB output in i.e. MHz
1026.6819.42
3-75
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.10 Field Strength Test
3.10.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of electric field strength with antennas, optionally with control
of an automatic antenna tower for setting the antenna height and polarization automatically (two masts
are also possible), as well as an automatic turntable for setting the orientation of the equipment under
test (EuT).
For a complete test the critical frequencies have to be measured with all settings of the three
"dimensions" antenna height, antenna polarization and turntable azimuth.
Depending on the defined stepsizes the test may become time consuming but smaller steps do not
necessarily lead to significantly higher levels; normally it is better to compensate for this uncertainty
through an appropriate acceptance margin (e.g. 6 dB) during the analysis.
Alternatively to the field strength preview test, a frequency list from a power test (30 - 1000 MHz, PEAKDetector, advantage: no expensive test chamber required, see 3.2) could be used as an input to the
field strength final test; this method however is not considered as very reliable with larger EuTs.
For the preview test it is important to find all disturbances from the EuT (the corresponding frequencies)
but because of the superimposition of emitted and reflected signals (on a metallic ground) the antenna
might be positioned in a minimum for certain frequency bands; measurements should generally be done
with both horizontal and vertical polarization; the antenna should be directed both to the front and to the
back of the EuT; the appropriate antenna height depends on the kind of test chamber:
In a screened chamber (only partially applied with absorbers; not suitable for final tests but almost no
ambient interference) a single mid position (ca. 2 m) seems to be sufficient but because of the many
reflections some minor disturbances might be "pushed up" whereas some stronger ones may come up
with a decreased level; therefore the data reduction of the preview should be done with a larger
acceptance offset and more frequencies have to be kept for the final test (e.g. in the open area).
In an anechoic chamber with metallic ground it seems to be sufficient to measure at two positions (1
m and 2.5 m), if the distance between antenna and EuT is 3 m; for greater distances (e.g. 10 m) more
positions (e.g. a step size of 1 m) on the full height range (1 m up to 4 m or more) have to be analyzed.
In an anechoic chamber with ground absorbers the reflections on the ground can be disregarded
(requires a limit line lowered by 6 dB !) so that a single mid position (ca. 2 m) should be sufficient for the
preview test.
An open area test site (OATS)is normally not suitable for automatic preview tests because of the many
ambient disturbances but the software can help: An optional frequency list with ambients can be used to
cut out for each frequency a range one IF bandwidth wide that won't be further analyzed; of course this
method has its problems if one or more frequencies of ambient interference are identical to those critical
ones of the EuT; in this case the operator has to find out (e.g. through switching the EuT off and on if
possible or by looking at the signal with a smaller IF bandwidth) whether the field strength generated by
the EuT is above the limit, but sometimes this can be impossible, when the ambient disturbance
exceeds the limit.
The delivered script parameters are designed for compliance testing with measurement receivers;
measurements with spectrum analyzers the preview test using (fast) sweeps could be done on more
settings of the mast and turntable and the final test then could run without a complete search but with
partial scans and "adjustment" of antenna height and turntable azimuth.
For so called ERP measurements (ERP = effective radiated power; unit in dBm; power in reference to a
half wave dipole) that have to include the test site attenuation, it is necessary to have an individual level
correction for each polarization, i.e., two sweep/scan tables that are identical except different system
transducers will be used. A second range table for preview and final test respectively has to be defined
that will be effective for all measurements with vertical polarization, whereas the first range table will be
active with horizontal polarization. That means the range table have different additional corrections (1.
1026.6819.42
3-76
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
site attenuation for the corresponding polarization and distance; 2. correction factor of the half wave
dipole; 3. conversion of electrical voltage [dBuV] into electrical power [dBm]).
If two automatic antenna masts are available then each of them can be used for a complete antenna
range (e.g. a biconical antenna: 30 - 300 MHz / a log. per. antenna: 300 - 1000 MHz), thus eliminating
manual interaction (if signal switching is done with a relay matrix) when antennas have to be changed (a
second symbolic name , e.g. "MAST2" has to be specified for mast and polarization). To compensate for
the azimuth deviation of each mast against the zero position axis of the turntable, azimuth correction
values have to be defined (e.g. +20 / -20 deg).
Annotation: There are antennas now available that are suitable for the whole frequency range from 30
MHz up to 1 GHz; this way any changing of antennas can be made totally superfluous within that range.
If needed, an auxiliary switch can be used for additional switching (extra shielding, different operation
modes, etc.), currently with the states ON and OFF only; if activated, an extra column, holding the state
of that switch, will be added to the results. If both states are defined for searching, then this will double
the number of states to be analyzed.
3.10.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55022
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
Distance:
FCC Part 15 Class A
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
Distance:
FCC Part 15 Class B
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
Distance:
1026.6819.42
30 - 1000 MHz
QP
ITE: Class B
10m
30 - 18000 MHz
QP below 1GHz; AV above 1 GHz
10m
30 - 5000 MHz
QP below 1GHz; AV above 1 GHz
10m
3-77
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.10.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"field_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 08 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-78
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2 preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd scan table for preview (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of a second scan range table for the preview test which to be used only
when measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first
scan range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional 2nd sweep table for preview (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of a second sweep range table for the preview test which will be used
only when measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the
first sweep range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: complete search (all accessory settings)
not checked
if checked sweeps/scans will be done on all accessory settings as specified
with the mast/turntable/polarization parameters for the preview test
(recommended for preview tests with sweeps, e.g. with an EMI analyzer);
else only one sweep/scans will be done with one fixed setting as specified with
clamp parameters for the preview test (recommended for preview tests with
scans, e.g. with an EMI test receiver)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
1026.6819.42
nd
3-79
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 1st limit line
"<none>"
st
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 1 detector (e.g.
QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: optional 1st acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
st
reduction of the preview results from the 1 detector; if used then the given
value for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd limit line
"<none>"
nd
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 2 detector (e.g.
AVERAGE)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: optional 2nd acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
nd
reduction of preview results from the 2 detector; if used then the given value
for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: freq. list of ambients to be cut out from preview
"<none>"
optional name of a frequency list (ambient interference) with frequencies to be
"cut out" from measurement results (preview test: scans/sweeps, final test:
partial scans), each "cut" with a range corresponding to the current IF
bandwidth, e.g. +/- 60 kHz around each of the frequencies if an IF bandwidth of
120 kHz is used; to blank a modulated interference it might be necessary to
provide more than one frequency in the list
1026.6819.42
3-80
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: cutting width for sweeps (ambients): no. of IF-BWs
10
with sweeps the width of a "cut" range (see previous parameter) has to be larger
because of the lower frequency resolution of the results; therefore this factor
(=number of IF bandwidths) will be used to enlarge the range compared with the
range used on scan results
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: merge all points from both detectors into same list
not checked
if checked then the points that have been found through the automatic data
reduction from both detectors will be merged into one single list which in turn will
be used for both detectors in the final test
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. QUASIPEAK) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans + maximization
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans; it will be used only when
measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first scan
range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: emulate partial scans through single meas.
not checked
if checked then each partial scan will not be performed as a real scan, but
instead will be emulated through single measurements at the corresponding
frequencies; this is necessary if the receiver only provides a spectrum analyzer
mode (pseudo single measurements through zero-span-sweeps plus 'marker-topeak' to gain the level result)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
1026.6819.42
3-81
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: complete search
checked
determines the search mode for the preview test: complete search means that
measurements will be done on all mast/turntable/polarization settings as
specified with the corresponding parameters for the final test (recommended
when the preview test has been performed with a fixed setting);
else: measurements will be done on those mast/turntable/polarization settings
that were determined through a "complete search" in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: perform accessory adjustment
checked
if checked then an additional search (in a small range) for the (local) maximum
level will be performed (mast height and turntable azimuth); this is
recommended, if the preview test was performed with only one or a small
number of settings of mast and turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: adjustment full range
not checked
if an additional search for the maximum level will be performed then not a small
range will be analyzed but the full positioning range (mast and turntable)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: optional 2nd scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements; it will be used only when measurements are done with vertical
polarization; if used then the first scan range table will be used with horizontal
polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
16: optional 2 scan table (vertical)
1026.6819.42
nd
3-82
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; it will be used only when
measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first scan
range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
17: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
18: optional input: preview result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing preview
result file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for PK or
PK+AV) or optionally two (e.g. 1st for PK, 2nd for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
19: optional input: preview result file (2 det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
20: optional input: frequency list
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or QP+AV) or
optionally two (e.g. 1st for QP, 2nd for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
21: optional input: frequency list (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
22: optional input: final result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing final result
file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or QP+AV) or
optionally two (e.g. 1st for QP, 2nd for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
23: optional input: final result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
1026.6819.42
nd
3-83
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
1026.6819.42
3-84
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Field Strength Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
Mast
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna mast through dialogue boxes will
be used
Parameter:
02: use auto positioning only
1026.6819.42
3-85
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna mast will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved mast
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna mast as defined in
the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: azimuth offset [deg] of mast
0
if two automatic masts are used so that these mast are not located in the 0
degree axis of the turntable, then a value for the azimuth correction can be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: symbolic name of optional 2nd automatic mast
"MAST2"
symbolic device name of the optional 2nd automatically controlled antenna mast
as defined in the device configuration menu; to make the script run with two
masts, an appropriate stop message has to be defined for each subrange in the
scan/sweep tables used for the preview or final test;
example:
1st mast "1 " or "1 xxxxx" (string has to start with a
2nd Mast "2 " or "2 xxxxx" digit followed by a blank)
for a full automatic test (without manual interaction) an additional relay matrix
(RSU) would have to be used for switching between antennas (the
corresponding signal paths would have to be selected in the scan/sweep tables)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: azimuth offset [deg] of optional 2nd mast
0
if two automatic masts are used so that these mast are not located in the 0
degree axis of the turntable, then a value for the azimuth correction can be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: control priority level (1=highest)
1
defines the priority level of the controlling of the antenna height (in combination
with turntable azimuth and antenna polarization): a value of 1 means highest
priority, 3 means lowest priority
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: min. height [cm] to be measured for preview
100
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: minimum height to be used for measurements
else: value will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: fixed/max. height [cm] to be measured for preview
300
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: determines the maximum height to be used for
measurements
else: fixed height to be used for measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: height stepsize [cm] for preview
200
stepsize for height variation in the preview test; normally two or three positions in
all is sufficient (for finding all suspect frequencies), if the final test includes a
1026.6819.42
3-86
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
complete search; this stepsize will be used in the final test as the height range
for an optional "adjustment", if the final test is done without complete search
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: min. height [cm] to be measured for finals
100
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the minimum height of the mast to be used
for measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: max. height [cm] to be measured for finals
400
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the maximum height of the mast to be used
for measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: height stepsize [cm] for finals
50
stepsize for height variation in the final test; this stepsize will also be used as the
height range for an optional "adjustment", if the final test is done with a complete
search
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: speed value for slower movements
2
determines the speed of the mast for the relatively slow movements for the
"adjustment" in the final test (some 1 or 2 measurements per sec. only !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: speed value for faster movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved mast for the relatively fast
movements for absolute positioning
Topic
Turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the turntable through dialogue boxes will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the turntable will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved turntable
"TURNTABLE"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled turntable as defined in the
device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: control priority level (1=highest)
2
defines the priority level of the controlling of the turntable azimuth (in
combination with antenna height and antenna polarization): a value of 1 means
highest priority, 3 means lowest priority
Parameter:
05: min. azimuth [deg] to be measured for preview
1026.6819.42
3-87
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
90
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: minimum azimuth to be used for measurements
else: value will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: fixed/max. azimuth [deg] to be measured for preview
270
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: determines the maximum azimuth to be used for
measurements
else: fixed azimuth to be used for measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: azimuth stepsize [deg] for preview
180
stepsize for azimuth variation in the preview test; normally two positions in all is
sufficient (for finding all suspect frequencies), if the final test includes a
complete search; this stepsize will be used in the final test as the azimuth range
for an optional "adjustment", if the final test is done without complete search
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: min. azimuth [deg] to be measured for finals
0
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the minimum azimuth of the turntable to be
used for measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: max. azimuth [deg] to be measured for finals
360
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the azimuth of the turntable to be used for
measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: azimuth stepsize [deg] for finals
45
stepsize for azimuth variation in the final test; this stepsize will also be used as
the azimuth range for an optional "adjustment", if the final test is done with a
complete search
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: speed value for slower movements
2
determines the speed of the turntable for the relatively slow movements for the
"adjustment" in the final test (some 1 or 2 measurements per sec. only !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: speed value for faster movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved turntable for the relatively fast
movements for absolute positioning
Topic
Polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna polarization through dialogue
boxes will be used
1026.6819.42
3-88
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna polarization will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. controlled polariz.
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna polarization as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: symbolic name of optional 2nd autom. polariz.
"<none>"
symbolic device name of an optional 2nd automatically controlled antenna
polarization as defined in the device configuration menu (see also Topic Mast)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: control priority level (1=highest)
3
defines the priority level of the controlling of the antenna polarization (in
combination with antenna height and turntable azimuth): a value of 1 means
highest priority, 3 means lowest priority
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: delay time [sec] for auto switching
4
defines a waiting time with automatic switching of the antenna polarization; the
delay time depends on the mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of
the antenna (the driver never gives a feedback when the switching has been
completed)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: preview measurements with horizontal polariz.
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with horizontal
polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: preview measurements with vertical polariz.
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with vertical
polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: final measurements with horizontal polariz.
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with horizontal
polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: final measurements with vertical polariz.
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with vertical
polarization
Topic
Auxiliary
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual auxiliary switching
not checked
if checked then manual control of an auxiliary switch through dialogue boxes will
be used; if activated an extra column, holding the state ("ON" or "OFF") of the
switch will be added to the results
Parameter:
02: name of auxiliary device
1026.6819.42
3-89
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"Auxiliary Device"
name of the auxiliary switch (will be displayed with the dialog boxes for
switching)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: preview measurements with aux. switch OFF
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the state
"OFF"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: preview measurements with aux. switch ON
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the state
"ON"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: final measurements with aux. switch OFF
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the state "OFF"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: final measurements with aux. switch ON
not checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the state "ON"
1026.6819.42
3-90
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.11 Field Strength Test (fast)
3.11.1 Description
Basically this test offers the same functionality as the normal "Field Strength Test", but it is optimized for
using an automatic antenna mast and an automatic turntable:
The preview test can be performed with sweeps only (a genuine EMI test receiver cannot be used!) with
the turntable simultaneously being moved. This way the total time for the preview test should be
reduced in half.
In the final test a partial scan will be done for each critical frequency.
3.11.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55022
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
Distance:
FCC Part 15 Class A
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
Distance:
FCC Part 15 Class B
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
Distance:
1026.6819.42
30 - 1000 MHz
QP
ITE: Class B
10m
30 - 18000 MHz
QP below 1GHz; AV above 1 GHz
10m
30 - 5000 MHz
QP below 1GHz; AV above 1 GHz
10m
3-91
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.11.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"fast_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-92
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional 2nd preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd sweep table for preview (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of a second sweep range table for the preview test which will be used
only when measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the
first sweep range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 1st limit line
"<none>"
st
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 1 detector (e.g.
QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: optional 1st acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
st
reduction of the preview results from the 1 detector; if used then the given
value for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
04: optional 2nd limit line
1026.6819.42
3-93
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
nd
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 2 detector (e.g.
AVERAGE)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: optional 2nd acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
nd
reduction of preview results from the 2 detector; if used then the given value
for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: merge all points from both detectors into same list
not checked
if checked then the points that have been found through the automatic data
reduction from both detectors will be merged into one single list which in turn will
be used for both detectors in the final test
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. QUASIPEAK) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans + maximization
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans; it will be used only when
measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first scan
1026.6819.42
3-94
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: emulate partial scans through single meas.
not checked
if checked then each partial scan will not be performed as a real scan, but
instead will be emulated through single measurements at the corresponding
frequencies; this is necessary if the receiver only provides a spectrum analyzer
mode (pseudo single measurements through zero-span-sweeps plus 'marker-topeak' to gain the level result)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: adjustment full range
not checked
if an additional search for the maximum level will be performed then not a small
range will be analyzed but the full positioning range (mast and turntable)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: optional 2nd scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements; it will be used only when measurements are done with vertical
polarization; if used then the first scan range table will be used with horizontal
polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: optional 2 scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; it will be used only when
measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first scan
range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
1026.6819.42
nd
3-95
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-96
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Electric Field Strength"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
11: comment line
1026.6819.42
3-97
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
Mast
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use auto positioning
checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna mast will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: symbolic name of autom. moved mast
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna mast as defined in
the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: azimuth offset [deg] of mast
0
if two automatic masts are used so that these mast are not located in the 0
degree axis of the turntable, then a value for the azimuth correction can be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: symbolic name of optional 2nd automatic mast
"MAST2"
symbolic device name of the optional 2nd automatically controlled antenna mast
as defined in the device configuration menu; to make the script run with two
masts, an appropriate stop message has to be defined for each subrange in the
scan/sweep tables used for the preview or final test;
example:
1st mast "1 " or "1 xxxxx" (string has to start with a
2nd mast "2 " or "2 xxxxx" digit followed by a blank)
for a full automatic test (without manual interaction) an additional relay matrix
(RSU) would have to be used for switching between antennas (the
corresponding signal paths would have to be selected in the scan/sweep tables)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: azimuth offset [deg] of optional 2nd mast
0
if two automatic masts are used so that these mast are not located in the 0
degree axis of the turntable, then a value for the azimuth correction can be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: control priority level (1=highest)
1
defines the priority level of the controlling of the antenna height (in combination
with the antenna polarization) in the preview test: a value of 1 means highest
priority (after the turntable) , 2 means lowest priority
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: min. height [cm] to be measured for preview
100
defines the minimum height to be used in the preview test
Parameter:
08: max. height [cm] to be measured for preview
1026.6819.42
3-98
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
300
defines the maximum height to be used in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: height stepsize [cm] for preview
200
defines the stepsize for height variation in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: min. height [cm] to be measured for adjustment
100
defines the minimum height to be used for the adjustment measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: max. height [cm] to be measured for adjustment
400
defines the maximum height to be used for the adjustment measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: height range [cm] for adjustment
50
defines the height range for the adjustment measurements; normally the value
corresponds to the height stepsize for the preview test (parameter 09)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: speed value for faster movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved mast for the relatively fast
movements for absolute positioning
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: speed value for slower movements
2
determines the speed of the mast for the relatively slow movements for the
"adjustment" in the final test (some 1 or 2 measurements per sec. only !)
Topic
Turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use auto positioning
checked
if checked then automatic control of the turntable will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: symbolic name of autom. moved turntable
"TURNTABLE"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled turntable as defined in the
device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: min. azimuth [deg] to be measured for preview
90
defines the minimum azimuth to be used in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: max. azimuth [deg] to be measured for preview
270
defines the maximum azimuth to be used in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: bidirectional azimuth sweeps at each position
not checked
if checked then at each position (made up of polarization and mast height) not
one but two movements - each in another direction - will be done within the
given azimuth limits
Parameter:
06: min. azimuth [deg] to be measured for final adjustment
1026.6819.42
3-99
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
0
defines the minimum azimuth to be used for the adjustment measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: max. azimuth [deg] to be measured for final adjustment
360
defines the maximum azimuth to be used for the adjustment measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: azimuth stepsize [deg] for finals
45
defines the azimuth range for the adjustment measurements; normally the value
corresponds to the azimuth range being covered by one sweep in the preview
test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: fast speed value for absolute positioning
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved turntable for the relatively fast
movements for absolute positioning
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: speed value for azimuth sweeps
1
determines the (typically slowest) speed of the turntable for the movements in
the preview test when sweeps will be simultaneously be performed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: slow speed value for adjustment
2
determines the speed of the turntable for the relatively slow movements for the
"adjustment" in the final test (some 1 or 2 measurements per sec. only !)
Topic
Polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use auto switching only
checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna polarization will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: symbolic name of autom. controlled polariz.
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna polarization as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of optional 2nd autom. polariz.
"<none>"
symbolic device name of an optional 2nd automatically controlled antenna
polarization as defined in the device configuration menu (see also Topic Mast)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: control priority level (1=highest)
2
defines the priority level of the controlling of the antenna polarization (in
combination with the antenna height) in the preview test: a value of 1 means
highest priority (after the turntable), 2 means lowest priority
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: delay time [sec] for auto switching
4
defines a waiting time with automatic switching of the antenna polarization; the
delay time depends on the mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of
the antenna (the driver never gives a feedback when the switching has been
completed)
1026.6819.42
3-100
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: preview measurements with horizontal polariz.
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with horizontal
polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: preview measurements with vertical polariz.
not checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with vertical
polarization
1026.6819.42
3-101
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.12 Magnetic Field Strength Test
3.12.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of magnetic interference, optionally with automatic control of
a triple loop antenna like the R&S HM020.
Besides, an automatic turntable can be controlled to turn the EuT.
An open area test site (OATS)is normally not suitable for automatic preview tests because of the many
ambient disturbances but the software can help: An optional frequency list with ambients can be used to
cut out for each frequency a range one IF bandwidth wide that won't be further analyzed; of course this
method has its problems if one or more frequencies of ambient interference are identical to those critical
ones of the EuT; in this case the operator has to find out (e.g. through switching the EuT off and on if
possible or by looking at the signal with a smaller IF bandwidth) whether the field strength generated by
the EuT is above the limit, but sometimes this can be impossible, when the ambient disturbance
exceeds the limit.
3.12.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
VDE0875/211
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
1026.6819.42
0.009 - 30 MHz
QP
ISM
3-102
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.12.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"mfield_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
0.09
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-103
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: complete search (all accessory settings)
not checked
if checked sweeps/scans will be done on all settings as specified with the
turntable parameters for the preview test (recommended for preview tests with
sweeps, e.g. with an EMI analyzer);
else only sweeps/scans will be done with one fixed setting as specified with
turntable parameters for the preview test (recommended for preview tests with
scans, e.g. with an EMI test receiver)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 1st limit line
"<none>"
st
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 1 detector (e.g.
QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
03: 2nd limit line
1026.6819.42
3-104
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
nd
a filename that corresponds to the limit line assigned to the 2 detector (e.g.
AVERAGE)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: freq. list of ambients to be cut out from preview
"<none>"
optional name of a frequency list (ambient interference) with frequencies to be
"cut out" from measurement results (preview test: scans/sweeps, final test:
partial scans), each "cut" with a range corresponding to the current IF
bandwidth, e.g. +/- 60 kHz around each of the frequencies if an IF bandwidth of
120 kHz is used; to blank a modulated interference it might be necessary to
provide more than one frequency in the list
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: cutting width for sweeps (ambients): no. of IF-BWs
10
with sweeps the width of a "cut" range (see previous parameter) has to be larger
because of the lower frequency resolution of the results; therefore this factor
(=number of IF bandwidths) will be used to enlarge the range compared with the
range used on scan results
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: merge all points from both detectors into same list
not checked
if checked then the points that have been found through the automatic data
reduction from both detectors will be merged into one single list which in turn will
be used for both detectors in the final test
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. QUASIPEAK) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the final
measurements; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
03: scan table for partial scans + maximization
1026.6819.42
3-105
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: complete search
checked
determines the search mode for the preview test:
complete search means that measurements will be done on all loop antenna
and turntable settings as specified with loop antenna parameters for the final
test (recommended when the preview test has been performed with a fixed
setting of the loop antenna);
else: measurements will be done on those loop antenna and turntable settings
that were determined through a "complete search" in the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: perform accessory adjustment
checked
if checked then an additional search (in a small range) for the (local) maximum
level will be performed with the turntable; this is recommended, if the preview
test was performed with only one or a small number of positions of the turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: adjustment full range
not checked
if an additional search for the maximum level will be performed then not a small
range will be analyzed but the full positioning range (mast and turntable)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
1026.6819.42
3-106
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: optional input: preview result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing preview
result file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for PK or for
st
nd
PK+AV) or optionally two (e.g. 1 for PK, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: optional input: preview result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: optional input: frequency list
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or for QP+AV)
st
nd
or optionally two (e.g. 1 for QP, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
16: optional input: frequency list (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
17: optional input: final result file
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing final result
file can be specified as an input for the final test, one (e.g. for QP or for QP+AV)
st
nd
or optionally two (e.g. 1 for QP, 2 for AV) input files
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
18: optional input: final result file (2nd det.)
"<none>"
see previous parameter
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
1026.6819.42
3-107
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Magn. Field Strength Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
1026.6819.42
3-108
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
LoopAntenna
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the loop antenna through dialogue boxes will
be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the triple loop antenna will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. switched triple loop
"HM020"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled triple loop antenna as
1026.6819.42
3-109
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
defined in the device configuration menu; the device properties must match with
the controlling device (e.g. IEEE command strings for an EMI test receiver)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: preview measurements on loop X
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the antenna
loop "X"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: preview measurements on loop Y
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the antenna
loop "Y"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: preview measurements on loop Z
checked
if checked then the preview measurements will (also) be done with the antenna
loop "Z"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: final measurements on loop X
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the antenna loop
"X"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: final measurements on loop Y
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the antenna loop
"Y"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: final measurements on loop Z
checked
if checked then the final measurements will (also) be done with the antenna loop
"Z"
Topic
Turntable
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual positioning only
checked
if checked then manual control of the turntable through dialogue boxes will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto positioning only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the turntable will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. moved turntable
"TURNTABLE"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled turntable as defined in the
device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: min. azimuth [deg] to be measured for preview
90
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: minimum azimuth to be used for measurements
else: value will be ignored
Parameter:
05: fixed/max. azimuth [deg] to be measured for preview
1026.6819.42
3-110
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
270
depending on the mode of the preview test:
complete preview search: determines the maximum azimuth to be used for
measurements
else: fixed azimuth to be used for measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: azimuth stepsize [deg] for preview
180
stepsize for azimuth variation in the preview test; normally two positions in all is
sufficient (for finding all suspect frequencies), if the final test includes a
complete search; this stepsize will be used in the final test as the azimuth range
for an optional "adjustment", if the final test is done without complete search
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: min. azimuth [deg] to be measured for finals
0
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the minimum azimuth of the turntable to be
used for measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: max. azimuth [deg] to be measured for finals
360
depending on the mode of the final test:
complete final search: determines the azimuth of the turntable to be used for
measurements in the final test
else: preview data will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: azimuth stepsize [deg] for finals
45
stepsize for azimuth variation in the final test; this stepsize will also be used as
the azimuth range for an optional "adjustment", if the final test is done with a
complete search
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: speed value for slower movements
2
determines the speed of the turntable for the relatively slow movements for the
"adjustment" in the final test (some 1 or 2 measurements per sec. only !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: speed value for faster movements
4
determines the speed of the automatically moved turntable for the relatively fast
movements for absolute positioning
1026.6819.42
3-111
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.13 GTEM Test
3.13.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of radiated
electromagnetic interference with an GTEM measurement cell.
The test starts with a preview test on three orientations of the EuT
and does a data reduction. In the final test (again on three
orientations) optionally partial scans can be performed; at all
critical points simple single measurements - based on a scan table
- will be done.
The measurement results will always be correlated to OATS results and be displayed in a separate
diagram. If a field strength limit is selected, then the correlated final results will be evaluated against this
limit, too.
For measurements optionally a "manipulator" for positioning the EuT can be used. This requires the
option ES-K50 (Universal GPIB Driver).
If this option is installed, then the driver 'USER_IEC' can be added to the device list; the assigned to this
driver could be e.g. "MANIPULATOR" or the model name of the device (e.g. "BOSS"). The settings
should first be checked with the corresponding interactive dialog ("Set Device...").
In the script parameters of Topic "Manipulator" the device has to be selected and the appropriate
GPIB commands have to be entered.
3.13.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55022
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
1026.6819.42
30 - 1000 MHz
Pk
(small and without preferred orientation)
3-112
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.13.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"gtem_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-113
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: GTEM X preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre X'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the preview test, gained with the EuT
oriented to axis 'X'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GTEM Y preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre Y'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the preview test, gained with the EuT
oriented to axis 'Y'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GTEM Z preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre Z'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the preview test, gained with the EuT
oriented to axis 'Z'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: OATS H preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre H'
"<none>"
optional filename for the correlated field strength results (horizontal
polarization) from the preview test; if no filename is specified then a default
name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: OATS V preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre V'
"<none>"
optional filename for the correlated field strength results (vertical polarization)
from the preview test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
1026.6819.42
3-114
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: limit line
"<none>"
a filename of the field strength limit line (for OATS) which shall be used for the
evaluation of the correlated final measurements; if no limit line is selected, then
no evaluation will be done
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: GTEM X final result, <none>: ID + '_fin X'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the final test, gained with the EuT oriented
to axis 'X'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GTEM Y final result, <none>: ID + '_fin Y'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the final test, gained with the EuT oriented
to axis 'Y'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GTEM Z final result, <none>: ID + '_fin Z'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the final test, gained with the EuT oriented
to axis 'Z'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: OATS H final result, <none>: ID + '_pre H'
"<none>"
optional filename for the correlated field strength results (horizontal
polarization) from the final test; if no filename is specified then a default name
will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: OATS V final result, <none>: ID + '_pre V'
"<none>"
optional filename for the correlated field strength results (vertical polarization)
from the final test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
1026.6819.42
3-115
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the single
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: optional input: frequency list
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: GTEM graphics configuration, <none>: ID + ' CELL'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test to display
the results from the GTEM cell; if no filename is specified then a default name
will be used
Parameter:
02: OATS graphics configuration, <none>: ID + ' OATS'
1026.6819.42
3-116
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test to display
the results correlated for the OATS; if no filename is specified then a default
name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
1026.6819.42
3-117
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"GTEM Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
GTEM
Parameter:
Default value:
01: GTEM parameter 'a' (cell size) [m]
0.5
1026.6819.42
3-118
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
defines the GTEM cell parameter 'a' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the size
of the cell
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GTEM parameter 'b' (septum height) [m]
1.0
defines the GTEM cell parameter 'b' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
height of the septum
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GTEM parameter 'g' (septum gap) [m]
0.36
defines the GTEM cell parameter 'g' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the gap
besides the septum
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: GTEM parameter 'x' (EuT position) [m]
0.0
defines the GTEM cell parameter 'x' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
horizontal position of the EuT
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: GTEM parameter 'y' (EuT position) [m]
0.5
defines the GTEM cell parameter 'y' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
vertical position of the EuT
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: GTEM parameter 'Z' (impedance) [Ohm]
50
defines the GTEM cell parameter 'Z' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
impedance of the cell
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: OATS parameter 'd' (distance) [m]
10
defines the OATS parameter 'd' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
measurement distance
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: OATS parameter 'e' (EuT height) [m]
0.5
defines the OATS parameter 'e' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the vertical
position of the EuT
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: OATS parameter 'hmin' (antenna height) [m]
1.0
defines the OATS parameter 'hmin' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
minimum antenna height
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: OATS parameter 'hmax' (antenna height) [m]
4.0
defines the OATS parameter 'hmax' (see chapter 2.9) which represents the
maximum antenna height
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: OATS parameter 'height step size' [m]
0.5
defines the OATS parameter 'height step size' (see chapter 2.9) which
represents the virtual step size of the antenna height positions
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: OATS parameter 'fully absorbing ground plane'
not checked
if checked then a fully absorbing ground plane is assumed, else a metal ground
1026.6819.42
3-119
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
plane (see chapter 2.9)
Topic
Manipulator
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: external manipulator device
"<none>"
symbolic name of the device for controlling of a GTEM EuT manipulator as
defined in the device configuration
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: GPIB initialization command
" *RST;PLD;RTL "
GPIB command for the initialization of the manipulator
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: GPIB command for position 'X'
"P4"
GPIB command make the manipulator move the EuT to the X position
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: GPIB command for position 'Y'
"P5"
GPIB command make the manipulator move the EuT to the Z position
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: GPIB command for position 'Z'
"P6"
GPIB command make the manipulator move the EuT to the Z position
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: waiting time in [s] for positioning
10
defines a waiting time positioning of the EuT; the delay time depends on the
mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of the EuT
1026.6819.42
3-120
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.14 S-LINE Test
3.14.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of radiated
electromagnetic interference with an S-LINE measurement cell.
The test starts with a preview test on three orientations of the EuT
and does a data reduction. In the final test (again on three
orientations) optionally partial scans can be performed; at all
critical points simple single measurements - based on a scan table
- will be done.
The measurement results will always be correlated to OATS
results and be displayed in a separate diagram. If a field strength
limit is selected, then the correlated final results will be evaluated
against this limit, too.
3.14.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
EN 55022
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
1026.6819.42
30 - 1000 MHz
Pk
(small and without preferred orientation)
3-121
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.14.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"s-line_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
1000
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-122
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: S-LINE X preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre X'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the preview test, gained with the EuT
oriented to axis 'X'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: S-LINE Y preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre Y'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the preview test, gained with the EuT
oriented to axis 'Y'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: S-LINE Z preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre Z'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the preview test, gained with the EuT
oriented to axis 'Z'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: OATS E preview result, <none>: ID + '_pre E'
"<none>"
optional filename for the correlated field strength results from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: limit line
"<none>"
a filename of the field strength limit line (for OATS) which shall be used for the
evaluation of the correlated final measurements; if no limit line is selected, then
no evaluation will be done
1026.6819.42
3-123
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: S-LINE X final result, <none>: ID + '_fin X'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the final test, gained with the EuT oriented
to axis 'X'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: S-LINE Y final result, <none>: ID + '_fin Y'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the final test, gained with the EuT oriented
to axis 'Y'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: S-LINE Z final result, <none>: ID + '_fin Z'
"<none>"
optional filename for the results from the final test, gained with the EuT oriented
to axis 'Z'; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: OATS E final result, <none>: ID + '_fin E'
"<none>"
optional filename for the correlated field strength results from the final test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
08: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
1026.6819.42
3-124
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the single
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: optional input: frequency list
"<none>"
if the test shall be performed without a preview test then an existing frequency
list can be specified as an input for the final test
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: S-LINE graphics configuration, <none>: ID + '_CELL'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test to display
the results from the S-LINE cell; if no filename is specified then a default name
will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: OATS graphics configuration, <none>: ID + '_OATS'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test to display
the results correlated for the OATS; if no filename is specified then a default
name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Topic
Report
1026.6819.42
3-125
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"S-LINE Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
1026.6819.42
3-126
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
SLINE
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: S-LINE type is 700
checked
if checked then a cell of the type S-LINE 700 will be assumed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: S-LINE type is 1000
not checked
if checked then a cell of the type S-LINE 1000 will be assumed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: S-LINE type is 1500
not checked
if checked then a cell of the type S-LINE 1500 will be assumed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: S-LINE correction factor (C1)
"<none>"
selection of the appropriate correction table (a system transducer) which
corresponds to the term 'C1' of the S-LINE correlation algorithm (for the S-LINE
1026.6819.42
3-127
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
type)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
1026.6819.42
05: OATS correction factor (C2)
"<none>"
selection of the appropriate correction table (a system transducer) which
corresponds to the term 'C2' of the S-LINE correlation algorithm (for the OATS
setup like e.g. the measurement distance)
3-128
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.15 Automotive Test
3.15.1 Description
This test provides measurement of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference according to
the automotive standard CISPR 25 (EN55025).
Tis standard define limits for narrowband (NB) and broadband (BB) interference.
The NB/BB discrimination is done through a comparison of the PEAK and AVERAGE levels. This
requires a sufficiently low noise floor to avoid that NB interferers will be interpreted as BB interferers.
For radiated emissions the script supports measurements with horizontal and vertical antenna
polarization (optionally with automatic switching).
The preview test will be done with the PEAK detector.
nd
If the preview test is done with PEAK+AVERAGE, then the 2 detector is informative only.
Those points critical referring to the NB limit will be evaluated with PEAK and AVERAGE, the BB
interferers optionally with QUASIPEAK. The NB/BB discrimination is realized through a simple
calculation of the difference (variable threshold) between PEAK and AVERAGE levels.
3.15.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
CISPR 25 (EN 55025) conducted
Frequency Range:
Detector:
0.15 - 108 MHz
Pk (AV) / QP
CISPR 25 (EN 55025) radiated
Frequency Range:
Detector:
0.15 - 960 MHz
Pk (AV) / QP
1026.6819.42
3-129
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.15.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"auto_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
300
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: confirmation for final test after data reduction
not checked
if checked then after data reduction a query will come up enables to skip the
final test within the current test range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 08 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
09: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
1026.6819.42
3-130
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Function:
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
st
optional filename for the results (1 detector, e.g. PEAK) from the preview test; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2 preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
nd
optional filename for the results (2 detector, e.g. AVERAGE) from the preview
test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd scan table for preview (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of a second scan range table for the preview test which to be used only
when measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first
scan range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional 2nd sweep table for preview (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of a second sweep range table for the preview test which will be used
only when measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the
first sweep range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: also perform interactive frequency selection
not checked
if checked then you can review the points that have been found through the
automatic data reduction, i.e. you can remove points or add new ones for the
test;. to do so you have to position the marker accordingly and select "Remove"
or "Test" in a dialog
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: NB limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the NB limit line
1026.6819.42
nd
3-131
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: optional NB acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
reduction; if used then the given value for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: BB limit line (PK)
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the BB limit for PEAK measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: optional BB limit line (QP)
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the optional BB limit for QUASIPEAK
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final NB result file, <none>: ID + '_fin NB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the NB results from the final measurements; if no filename
is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: final BB result file, <none>: ID + '_fin BB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the BB results from the final measurements; if no filename
is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans + maximization
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional 2nd scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for maximization
measurements as well as for partial scans; it will be used only when
measurements are done with vertical polarization; if used then the first scan
range table will be used with horizontal polarization only
1026.6819.42
3-132
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: complete search on selected polarisations
checked
determines the search mode for the preview test: complete search means that
measurements will be done on all polarization settings as specified with the
polarization parameters for the final test;
else: measurements will be done on those clamp settings that were determined
through the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: optional 2nd scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements; it will be used only when measurements are done with vertical
polarization; if used then the first scan range table will be used with horizontal
polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: decision threshold [dB] for NB/BB discrimination
6
determines the decision level threshold for the selected NB/BB discrimination;
the standard requires a value of 6.0 dB
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
13: opt. scan table for final QP measurements
"<none>"
optional filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
QP measurements
1026.6819.42
3-133
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
nd
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
14: optional 2 scan table (vertical)
"<none>"
optional filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
QP measurements; it will be used only when measurements are done with
vertical polarization; if used then the first scan range table will be used with
horizontal polarization only
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
15: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
1026.6819.42
3-134
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"Automotive Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
1026.6819.42
3-135
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
Polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: use manual switching only
checked
if checked then manual control of the antenna polarization through dialogue
boxes will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: use auto switching only
not checked
if checked then automatic control of the antenna polarization will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: symbolic name of autom. controlled polariz.
"MAST"
symbolic device name of the automatically controlled antenna polarization as
defined in the device configuration menu
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: delay time [sec] for auto switching
4
defines a waiting time with automatic switching of the antenna polarization; the
delay time depends on the mechanical system and maybe also on the weight of
the antenna (the driver never gives a feedback when the switching has been
completed)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: measurements with horizontal polarization
not checked
if checked then the all measurements will (also) be done with horizontal
polarization
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: measurements with vertical polarization
checked
if checked then the all measurements will (also) be done with vertical
polarization
1026.6819.42
3-136
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.16 EMI STD Test
3.16.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference
according to those specifications that do not require a classification for narrowband (NB) and broadband
(BB) signals ( e.g. MIL STD 461/462 D, DEF-STAN, etc.). The test starts with a preview test (sweep or
scan with single detector) and does a data reduction. In the final test optionally partial scans can be
performed; at all critical points simple single measurements - based on a scan table - will be done.
3.16.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
MIL STD 461 D CE101
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.03 - 10 kHz
Pk
Power Leads
MIL STD 461 D CE102
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.01 - 10 MHz
Pk
Power Leads
MIL STD 461 D RE101
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.03 - 100 kHz
Pk
Magnetic Field Emissions
MIL STD 461 D RE102
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
10 kHz - 18 GHz
Pk
Electric Field Emissions
1026.6819.42
3-137
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.16.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"emi_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30e-6
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
10e3
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
1026.6819.42
3-138
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
optional filename for the (PEAK) results from the preview test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required limit line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
reduction; if used then the given value for the acceptance offset will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: broadband correction (/MHz) of results
not checked
if checked then an additional bandwidth correction will be done on the results
which therefore will be displayed with the broadband unit (required by standard
RTCA/DO-160); in that case the limit has to be defined with that level unit, too
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
1026.6819.42
3-139
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final result file, <none>: ID + '_fin'
"<none>"
optional filename for the (PEAK) results from the final test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: scan table for partial scans + single meas.
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final test, for
partial scans as well as for single measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: opt. scan table for final meas. >1GHz
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
measurements, but only for frequencies above 1 GHz; this way measurements
above 1 GHz can be done with an other detector (e.g. PEAK) than those below
1 GHz (e.g. QUASIPEAK)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
1026.6819.42
3-140
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
1026.6819.42
3-141
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"EMI STD Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
1026.6819.42
3-142
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
1026.6819.42
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
3-143
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.17 MIL STD 461/462 C Test
3.17.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference
according to the American MIL STD 461/462 C specifications. Some of the specifications require a
classification for narrowband (NB) and broadband (BB) signals.
A NB/BB discrimination can be done only on scan results (from a preview scan or from partial scans in
the final test); single measurements will not be performed.
To make use of the PK-AV method the selected scan table has to be defined with exactly these
detectors (1st PK, 2nd AV).
The tuning methods require certain scan step sizes, depending on the defined IF bandwidth; for the
points at the edge of the scan table's subranges there won't be any NB/BB results because the
algorithm works within these subranges only.
The PK-AV method is the most reliable discrimination method but the scans require more time to
perform (two detectors).
Above 1 GHz no discrimination will be done; for that frequency range the specifications don't have BB
limits.
3.17.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
MIL STD 461 C CE01
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.03 - 15 kHz
Pk (NB)
Part 3 Equipment
MIL STD 461 C CE03
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.015 - 50 MHz
Pk (NB), Pk/MHz (BB)
Part 3 Equipment: Navy and Air Force
MIL STD 461 C RE01
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.03 - 50 kHz
Pk (NB)
Part 3 Equipment
MIL STD 461 C RE02
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
0.014 - 10000 MHz (NB), 0.014 - 1000 MHz (BB)
Pk (NB), Pk/MHz (BB)
Part 3 Equipment (Curve #1)
1026.6819.42
3-144
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.17.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
Test
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"mil_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30e-6
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
10e3
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
1026.6819.42
3-145
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
optional filename for the PEAK results from the preview test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
optional filename for the AVERAGE results from the preview test; if no filename
is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: NB limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required NB limit line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional NB acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
reduction of NB results; if used then the given value for the acceptance offset
will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: BB limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required BB limit line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional BB acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
reduction of BB results; if used then the given value for the acceptance offset
will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
06: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
1026.6819.42
3-146
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: 0/1/2/3: NB/BB discr.: none/tun1BW/tun2BW/PK-AV
2
type of narrowband/broadband discrimination:
no discrimination / tuning method +/- 1 IF bandwidth / tuning method +/- 2 IF
bandwidths / PK/AV comparison method
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: decision threshold [dB] for NB/BB reduction
6.0
determines the decision level threshold for the selected NB/BB discrimination;
recommended values are 6 dB for the tuning methods and 12 dB for the PK-AV
comparison method
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: max. no. of BB results kept per octave
3
maximum number of BB results to be kept per octave from the final results
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final NB result file, default: ID + '_fin NB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the NB results from the final test; if no filename is specified
then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: final BB result file, default: ID + '_fin BB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the BB results from the final test; if no filename is specified
then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for partial scans in
the final test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
1026.6819.42
3-147
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
Graphic
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: NB graphics configuration, default: ID + ' NB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used for the NB results; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: BB graphics configuration, default: ID + ' BB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used for the BB results; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
1026.6819.42
3-148
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Default value:
Function:
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"MIL STD 461/462C Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
1026.6819.42
3-149
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
1026.6819.42
3-150
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.18 MIL STD D Limits
3.18.1 Description
In the U.S. norm 'MIL-STD 461/462 D' for conducted measurements, depending on the actual current on
the leads, the level limit may be increased. With this auxiliary script it is very easy to derive a
corresponding new limit line.
1026.6819.42
3-151
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.18.2 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Conversion
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: Name of the reference limit line
"<none>"
name of the limit line which shall be used as a reference
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: Name of the new limit line
"<none>"
name of the new limit line which shall be calculated (parallel shift by the offset
value)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: Current in Ampere
1.0
value of the lead current in Ampere
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: Name of graphics configuration
"<none>"
name of the graphics configuration to be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: Limit shifting according to CE 101-1
not checked
if checked then a constant offset will be calculated to define the new limit line a
the sum of the reference limit line and of the offset:
current <= 3.0 A : offset = 0 dB
current >= 185.0 A : offset = 35 dB
else: offset = 20 * log10(current / 3.0)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: Limit shifting according to CE 101-2
not checked
if checked then a constant offset will be calculated to define the new limit line a
the sum of the reference limit line and of the offset:
current <= 1.0 A : offset = 0 dB
else: offset = 20 * log10(current / 3.0)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: Limit shifting according to CE 101-3
not checked
if checked then a constant offset will be calculated to define the new limit line a
the sum of the reference limit line and of the offset:
current <= 2.0 A : offset = 0 dB
else: offset = 20 * log10(current / 3.0)
1026.6819.42
3-152
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
3.19 GAM Test
3.19.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of conducted and radiated electromagnetic interference
according to the French military standard GAM EG 13. Some of the specifications require a
classification for narrowband (NB) and broadband (BB) signals.
A NB/BB discrimination can be done only on scan results (from a preview scan or from partial scans in
the final test); single measurements will not be performed.
To make use of the PK-AV method the selected scan table has to be defined with exactly these
detectors (1st PK, 2nd AV).
The tuning methods require certain scan step sizes, depending on the defined IF bandwidth; for the
points at the edge of the scan table's subranges there won't be any NB/BB results because the
algorithm works within these subranges only.
The PK-AV method is the most reliable discrimination method but the scans require more time to
perform (two detectors).
Above 1 GHz no discrimination will be done; for that frequency range the specifications don't have BB
limits.
The standard requires final measurements of NB interferers with AV, BB interferers with PK.
3.19.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specifications are supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
GAM EG 13 C1
Frequency Range:
Detector:
30 Hz - 50 MHz (NB), 10 kHz - 50 MHz (BB)
Pk (NB), Pk (BB)
GAM EG 13 C2
Frequency Range:
Detector:
0.01 - 50 MHz
Pk (NB)
GAM EG 13 C3
Frequency Range:
Detector:
0.01 - 50 MHz
Pk (NB), Pk (BB)
GAM EG 13 R1
Frequency Range:
Detector:
0.03 - 50 kHz
Pk (NB)
GAM EG 13 R3
Frequency Range:
Detector:
0.01 - 10000 MHz (NB), 0.01 - 1000 MHz (BB)
Pk (NB), Pk (BB)
1026.6819.42
3-153
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.19.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
Test
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"gam_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30e-6
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
10e3
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: split frequency range into test ranges
checked
the total frequency range of the test can optionally be split into test ranges
(linear or logarithmic, with respect to the ranges of the scan/sweep range table)
that are calculated by the script and will be completely tested (preview test,
data reduction, final test), therefore reducing the time elapsed between preview
and final test, which is very useful with interference drifting over frequency;
besides, this method reduces manual interaction, if more than one probe
transducer has to be used for the test (e.g. two antennas for 30 - 1000 MHz in a
field strength test); the value given with parameter Test 07 has to be interpreted
as a minimum value; if the value is set to (typically) 1 then nevertheless for each
subrange of the scan/sweep table which used for the preview test, a test range
will be calculated (e.g. a field strength test with two antennas or scan/sweep
ranges will lead to one test range each); if splitting is not used then the whole
frequency range of the scan/sweep table will be tested as one single test range
(but maybe with a number of messageboxes requiring to change the antenna !)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: if splitting of frequency range: do with log. scale
checked
if checked then the splitting of the frequency range (if activated) will lead to test
ranges of equal width in the logarithmic scale, else in the linear scale
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: no. of test ranges for splitting of frequency range
1
defines the number of test ranges that shall be calculated for the splitting of the
frequency range
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
1026.6819.42
3-154
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
optional filename for the PEAK results from the preview test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: 2nd preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre2'
"<none>"
optional filename for the AVERAGE results from the preview test; if no filename
is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: sweep table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the sweep range table to be used for the preview test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the preview test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
DataReduction
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: NB limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required NB limit line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional NB acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
reduction of NB results; if used then the given value for the acceptance offset
will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: BB limit line
"<none>"
a filename that corresponds to the required BB limit line
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: optional BB acceptance line (no offset)
"<none>"
a filename of an optional limit line which will be directly used as a quasi
arbitrarily defined acceptance line for the acceptance analysis during data
reduction of BB results; if used then the given value for the acceptance offset
will be ignored
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. no. of results kept per test range
6
the maximum number of results that will be kept from each test range through
data reduction
Parameter:
06: decision threshold [dB] for peak reduction
1026.6819.42
3-155
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Default value:
Function:
6.0
determines the decision level when data reduction is done with the "Peak
Reduction"; a higher (stricter) value means that less peaks will be detected in
the spectrum so that more results from the subrange maxima reduction will
come through
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: level offset [dB] for acceptance analysis
-10.0
determines the level offset when data reduction is done with the "Acceptance
Analysis"
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: 0/1/2/3: NB/BB discr.: none/tun1BW/tun2BW/PK-AV
2
type of narrowband/broadband discrimination:
no discrimination / tuning method +/- 1 IF bandwidth / tuning method +/- 2 IF
bandwidths / PK/AV comparison method
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: decision threshold [dB] for NB/BB reduction
6.0
determines the decision level threshold for the selected NB/BB discrimination;
recommended values are 6 dB for the tuning methods and 12 dB for the PK-AV
comparison method
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: max. no. of BB results kept per octave
3
maximum number of BB results to be kept per octave from the final results
Topic
Final
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: final NB result file, default: ID + '_fin NB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the NB results from the final test; if no filename is specified
then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: final BB result file, default: ID + '_fin BB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the BB results from the final test; if no filename is specified
then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: scan table for partial scans
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for partial scans in
the final test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: perform partial scans
not checked
if checked then additional partial scans will be performed around the frequencies
to be analyzed; in this case the final measurements will be done on those
frequencies that have been found (through data reduction) with these partial
scans (recommended when preview was done with sweeps or when drifting
interference is to be expected)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: max. no. of results kept from partial scans
2
when a partial scan is performed then after data reduction there might still be
more than one significant frequency linked to interference; this parameter limits
1026.6819.42
3-156
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
the number of results from a partial scan (after data reduction)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: partial scan width: no. of IF-BWs (0=use ratio)
0
determines the frequency range for partial scans expressed in multiples of the IF
bandwidth used in the referring scan/sweep table; if the value is set to 0 then the
calculation of the partial scan width is based on the following parameter
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: partial scan width: ref. frequ. ratio
0.01
determines the frequency range for partial scans (e.g. 0.01 means +/-0.5 %) in
reference to the given mid frequency; the parameter is effective only if the
previous parameter is set to 0
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: scan table for final measurements
"<none>"
filename of the corresponding scan range table to be used for the final
st
measurements; according to GAM EG 13 use: 1 detector AV for the NB
nd
interferers and 2 detector PK for the BB interferers
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: insert results into existing result file
not checked
if not checked then any existing result files with a filename identical to the
filename used in the final test will be deleted/overwritten;
else: any existing result files will only partly be overwritten (within the specified
frequency range); this way it is possible to remeasure certain bands of the
spectrum while keeping the rest unchanged
Topic
Graphic
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: NB graphics configuration, default: ID + ' NB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used for the NB results; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: BB graphics configuration, default: ID + ' BB'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used for the BB results; if
no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: PK curve graphics config., <none>: ID + ' PK'
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used for the PEAK results
(preview curve); if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
1026.6819.42
3-157
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: 2nd header line
"GAM EG 13 Test"
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
1026.6819.42
3-158
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
12: 2nd comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
1026.6819.42
3-159
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.20 RF Exposure Test
3.20.1 Description
This test provides automatic measurement of electromagnetic power, including the calculation of the
absolute and (referring to a limit line) the relative power flux density.
The purpose of the test is the evaluate the total ambient RF power that affects a human being at a
certain location. To achieve this, the electric field strength will be measured over a large frequency
range with antennas that have a receiving characteristic similar to that of a human body (e.g. vertically
polarized rod antennas).
The (proposed) limits existing so far describe the equivalent field strength (V/m) against frequency that
a single sinusoidal carrier (nothing else in the whole spectrum) may reach: the relative power flux
density then has exactly a value of 1.0 .
The units of the limits of the equivalent field strength can be converted using the following formulas:
Eg
Eg ´
limit of the equivalent electric field strength [V/m]
logarithmic value of the limit of the equivalent electric field strength [dBuV/m]
Eg´
= 20 log10(Eg * 106)
and respectively
Eg
= (10(E´/20) * 10-6)
The actual power flux density can be evaluated through summing up of all contributions to the spectrum
(3 dB bandwith of the IF filter):
2
Absolute power flux density Sabs [W/m ]
E
E´
Zo
electric field strength [V/m]
logarithmic value of the electric field strength [dBuV/m]
electromagnetic impedance in space (120 * PI Ohm = 377 Ohm)
Sabs
= SUM [E2 / Zo]
= 1/ Zo * SUM [ E ]2
= 1/ Zo * SUM [ 10(E´/20) * 10-6 ]2
= 1/ Zo * SUM [ 10(E´/10) * 10-12 ]
= 1/ Zo * SUM [ 10(E´/10 - 12) ]
1026.6819.42
3-160
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
Relative power flux density Srel (has no unit)
E
E´
Eg
Eg´
electric field strength [V/m]]
logarithmic value of the electric field strength [dBuV/m]
limit of the equivalent electric field strength [V/m
logarithmic value of the limit of the equivalent electric field strength [dBuV/m]
Srel
= SUM [ E / Eg.]2
= SUM [ ( 10(E´/20) * 10-6 ) / ( 10(Eg´/20) * 10-6 ) ]2
= SUM [ 10(E´-Eg´)/20 ]2
= SUM [ 10(E´-Eg´)/10 ]
The time for calculating the relative power flux density can significantly be shortened if a predefined
uncertainty (e.g. maximum 2 %) is tolerable, i.e., if only those parts of the spectrum will be considered
that contribute enough to the result; this method is realized through an acceptance analysis for each
range of constant step size and IF bandwidth, with an acceptance offset (in dB) that will be calculated
using the following formula:
B
sw
tol
Offset
step size = 3 dB bandwidth of the IF filter [Hz]]
(typ. 0.7 * nominal IF bandwidth)
frequency range under consideration (scan width) [Hz]
(in the test the width of the current subrange)
tolerance (maximum uncertainty) [%]
10 * log10( sw / (B * tol/100) )
For those frequency ranges where no limit is defined, only the absolute power flux density can be
evaluated.
The step size in the scan range table has to match with the IF bandwidth in use (step size = 3 dB
bandwidth), so that the whole spectrum will be evaluated without any gaps and also without any
overlaps; the only detector suitable for the test is the RMS detector, which means that a receiving
instrument without an RMS detector can´t be used for the test. The names of the antenna factors to be
used in the test have also to be specified in the scan range table.
3.20.2 Parameter Sets
Currently the following specification is supported by the ES-K1 Standard Data:
VDE 0848 Part 2
Frequency Range:
Detector:
Test Samples:
1026.6819.42
30 kHz - 300 GHz
RMS
(exposition range)
3-161
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
3.20.3 List of the Script Parameters
Topic
Test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: ID max. 12 chars to be included in filenames
"exp_0001"
a short string that will be used for building up various default strings (see below);
this string enables easy identification of files that belong to the same test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: global start frequency [MHz] for the test
30e-3
no measurements will be done below this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: global stop frequency [MHz] for the test
300e9
no measurements will be done above this frequency
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: suppress queries as far as possible
not checked
if not checked then additional queries will come up that help to avoid overwriting
of files or to skip certain parts of the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: test configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of the test configuration (lists all files belonging to the test, for
easy transfers through Export/Import/Move) to be created by the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Topic
Preview
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: preview result file, <none>: ID + '_pre'
"<none>"
optional filename for the (PEAK) results from the preview test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: scan table for preview
"<none>"
filename of the scan range table to be used for the preview test
Topic
Graphics
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: graphics configuration, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the graphics configuration to be used in the test; if no
filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional graphics template (new graph only)
"<none>"
optional file name of a predefined graphics configuration, from which the
graphics configuration to be used in the test shall be derived (line type and color
settings)
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: minimize graphics for test
not checked
if checked then the graphics will be minimized before the measurements starts
and it will be restored before generating the report; therefore no graphics
1026.6819.42
3-162
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Scripts
updates will occur which in turn avoids any possible delays when handling very
long scan curves
Topic
Report
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: generate printer hardcopy
checked
if checked then a report configuration for printing will be generated and a
hardcopy will be sent to the device which is defined as the printer for the
software
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: generate RTF file
not checked
if checked then a report file will be created using the "Rich Text Format" (a kind
of generic MS Word format) which can be edited with many other text
processing software products
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: RTF file: 'X:\<path>\<name8.3>', empty: dialog
"c:\xxx.rtf"
path + file name (8.3 name format) of the RTF file if the RTF report is activated;
if an empty string is used then a file selection dialog will come up
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
04: report config. for printing, <none>: ID + '_prnt'
"<none>"
optional filename for the report configuration for printing, if printer output is
selected; if no filename is specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: footnote, empty field: ID
""
optional text as a footnote on the pages of the test report; if an empty string is
used then the ID string of the test will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: optional text file to be included
"<none>"
filename of an optional file of type 'Text' which shall be included in the report
Topic
ReportHeader
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: test report header, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename for the report header to be used in the test; if no filename is
specified then a default name will be used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: optional test report header template, <none>: ID
"<none>"
optional filename of a report header which shall be taken as a template for the
one to be used in the test; if no filename is specified then a default name will be
used
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
03: 1st header line
"TEST"
a string that will be taken as the first header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
04: 2nd header line
"RF Exposure"
1026.6819.42
3-163
E-8
Standard Scripts
ES-K1
Function:
a string that will be taken as the second header line; if no string is given then the
referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
05: EuT name
"EuT"
a string that will be taken as the description of the equipment under test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
06: manufacturer
""
a string that will be taken as the name of the manufacturer (of the EuT); if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
07: operating conditions
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the conditions of the test; if no
string is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
08: test site
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test site; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
09: operator
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the operator; if no string is given
then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
10: test specification
""
a string that will be taken as the description of the test specification; if no string
is given then the referring entry of the report header won't be changed
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
11: comment line (empty field: start time)
""
a string that will be taken as a comment line ; if no string is given then the start
time of the test will be entered
Topic
RfExposure
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
01: limit line
"<none>"
limit line for the test
Parameter:
Default value:
Function:
02: rel. power flux: result tolerance [%] (0: no acc. analysis)
0
defines the maximum uncertainty of the relative power flux density if a data
reduction shall be done through an acceptance analysis; if the value is set to 0
then all measurements will be considered for the calculation
1026.6819.42
3-164
E-8
4 Standard Device Drivers
1026.6819.42
4-0
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Device Drivers
4.1 V Networks ESH2-Z5 / ENV 4200 and ES-H3-Z5 / ENV 216
The drivers provide all functions that are necessary for controlling the artificial mains networks ESH2-Z5
/ ENV 4200 (four line V-network) and ESH3-Z5 / ENV 216 (two line V-network) from Rohde&Schwarz.
4.1.1 Interactive Mode
With the selection of ESH2-Z5... or ES-H3-Z5... in the menu Test - Set device the corresponding
dialogue comes up:
One of the provided lines (live, neutral) can be chosen. In addition the protective earth can be set (no
effect on ENV 4200; with ENV 216 this will set the optional high pass filter) to be either open (floating) or
grounded.
4.1.2 Script Mode
In the script mode the settings of the artificial mains network are done by means of the commands
set_device(...) and get_device(...). A detailed description is given in chapter 5.2 of the "script
development kit".
Setup of the line to be tested
Command: LISN_PHASE
Parameter: "N", "P1"
"P2", "P3" (ESH2-Z5 only)
Setup of the PE (floating / grounded)
Command: LISN_PE
Parameter: "FLO", "GND"
4.1.3 IEEE Bus Commands
The IEEE bus commands for remote control are dependant on the instrument to which the artificial
mains network is connected to. The control works via the user port of that instrument.
The settings have to be done in the dialogue Properties in the menu Device configuration with respect to
the referring instrument.
1026.6819.42
4-1
E-8
Standard Device Drivers
ES-K1
With the installation of an option ES-K1x all necessary commands are already provided (files S_NN2.INI
for ESH2-Z5 / ENV 4200, S_NN3.INI for ESH3-Z5).
Through double clicking of a certain receiver all IEEE bus commands that are suited to control the user
port will be displayes in the corresponding fields. Receivers that are not used might be deleted from the
list (the commands for those receivers will also be deleted!), and only "active" receivers can be inserted
into the list.
The commands can be arbitrarily edited (max. 50 characters) so that the driver could also be used for
other purposes, e.g. for switching - via the user port - of a device under test.
1026.6819.42
4-2
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Device Drivers
4.2 Triple Loop Antenna HM020
The drivers provide all functions that are necessary for controlling the triple loop antenna HM020 from
Rohde&Schwarz.
4.2.1 Interactive Mode
With the selection of HM020... in the menu Test - Set device the corresponding dialogue comes up:
One of the three loops can be selected.
4.2.2 Script Mode
In the script mode the settings of the triple loop antenna are done by means of the commands
set_device(...) and get_device(...). A detailed description is given in chapter 5.2 of the "script
development kit".
Setup of the loop to be tested
Command: LOOP
Parameter: "X", "Y", "Z"
4.2.3 IEEE Bus Commands
The IEEE bus commands for remote control are dependant on the instrument to which the artificial
mains network is connected to. The control works via the user port of that instrument.
The settings have to be done in the dialogue Properties in the menu Device configuration with respect to
the referring instrument.
With the installation of an option ES-K1x all necessary commands are already provided (file
SH_HM020.INI) but depending on the cable to be used, other settings might be required (chech with volt
meter).
The commands can be arbitrarily edited (max. 50 characters) so that the driver could also be used for
other purposes, e.g. for switching - via the user port - of a device under test.
1026.6819.42
4-3
E-8
Standard Device Drivers
ES-K1
4.3 Relay Matrix RSU/PSU
The drivers provide all functions that are necessary for controlling the relay matrix devices RSU and
PSU from Rohde&Schwarz. The RSU is identical to the PSU except the electrical specifications of the
RF relays.
4.3.1 Concept
The software can control up to four RSU units. These units can be used separately as well as combined.
For a combined usage there's an extra driver SUPER-RSU that is not associated to any interface but
can address any of the installed RSU drivers. Therefore the SUPER-RSU driver is a means to handle a
set of RSU drivers, e.g.:
SUPER-RSU => {RSU1}
or
SUPER-RSU => {RSU1 + RSU2 + RSU3 + RSU4}
Automatic switching of one or more RSUs during sweeps/scans (change of antennas or receivers) is
possible only through making use of the SUPER-RSU driver; here additional system transducers should
be defined to take respect of the signal loss through the relay cabling. For all other puposes it is
sufficient to use of the RSU driver(s) only.
4.3.2 Setup of the RSU Drivers
To get the drivers into the device list, one has to go into the device configuration, press the Load button
and then go into the selection box 'Device'.
Select the RSU, edit the name (e.g. RSU1 if you want to use more than one RSU) and the GPIB
address, then add the device to the list.
Repeat this for all (max. 4) RSUs you want to install.
If needed, also select the SUPER-RSU and add it to the device list now.
Now the relay switch definitions have to be made:
For each RSU driver go to the Properties... and define switching paths ('Signal Path') and the
corresponding commands, e.g.:
for RSU1 (path name / command):
'Path X'
'S1 R2'
(set relay 1; reset relay 2)
'Path Y'
'R1 R2'
(reset relay 1; reset relay 2)
'Path Z'
'R1 S2'
(reset relay 1; set relay 2)
for RSU2 (path name / command):
'Path Left'
'S3 S4'
'Path Right'
'R3 R4'
(set relay 3; set relay 4)
(reset relay 3; reset relay 4)
Now leave the dialogs and test all path definitions through the interactive dialog(s) for the relay matrix:
'Test' => 'Set device...' => 'RSU1'
Select a path and press Switch. Check the relay settings through the RSU's front panel LEDs.
1026.6819.42
4-4
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Device Drivers
4.3.3 Setup of the SUPER-RSU Driver
Before you define any settings for the SUPER-RSU you should first define system transducers for the
cables you're using, e.g. 'Cable low range' and 'Cable hi range'.
Now look at the following example:
You want to use relay 3 of RSU2 to switch automatically between Antenna1 and Antenna2 during
scans/sweeps.
Antenna1
'Cable low range'
>>>------------------------|
########
# RSU2 #------('Cable standard')------> Receiver
########
|
>>>------------------------Antenna2
'Cable hi range'
You have to go into the Properties... dialog (Device Configuration). Define a global 'Signal Path Name'
and associate the refering RSUx paths (select and add), along with the corresponding system
transducer (cable loss), e.g.:
Antenna1
RSU2: 'Path Left'
(RSUx: '...')
System Transducer: 'Cable low range'
Antenna2
RSU2: 'Path Left'
(RSUx: '...')
System Transducer: 'Cable hi range'
Now when you create or edit any scan/sweep range table, select the required 'Signal Path' for each
range, e.g.:
0 - 300 MHz
Antenna1 (text 'Cable low range' will appear)
300 - 1000 MHz
Antenna2 (text 'Cable hi range' will appear)
Any cables that belong to both signal paths can be added as "Additional Transducers".
4.3.4 Script Mode
In the script mode the settings of the RSU devices are done by means of the commands set_device(...)
and get_device(...). A detailed description is given in chapter 5.2 of the "script development kit".
1026.6819.42
4-5
E-8
Standard Device Drivers
ES-K1
4.4 Driver LPT I/O
4.4.1 Overview
The driver LPT I/O provides all functions that are necessary for controlling a parallel port of the PC. The
driver can be used for simple monitoring and controlling purposes.
4.4.2 Hardware
The parallel port can be used as a controlling/monitoring interface, i.e., the lines of the interface can
separately be set as output lines or be read as input lines. Setting and reading of the lines will occur only
when the driver is being told to do so, not permanently in the background.
The driver LPT I/O makes use of the following signals (pin no. in brackets):
Reading:
/ERROR (Pin # 15), SLCT (# 13), PE (# 12), /ACK (#10), /BUSY (# 11)
Writing:
D0 - D7 (# 2-9), /STROBE (# 1), AUTO FEED (# 14), /INIT (# 16), SLCT IN (# 17)
The hardware control registers will be directly accessed.
A more detailed description of the PC's parallel port can be found in various publications.
4.4.3 Properties
Through selecting of the LPT I/O driver in the device configuration and clicking onto the button
Properties, the following dialog for the setup of the driver will appear:
In the upper area of the dialog, one of the parallel ports can be selected as an interface (normally
there's no problem if the hardlock is attached to the same interface port). With the field Address the
base I/O address of the port can be selected. If the address is not known then e.g. start the diagnostics
program MSD.EXE and look for the LPT ports.
Parameter:
Function:
Value range:
Interface
selection of the parallel port
LPT1, LPT2, LPT3.
Parameter:
Function:
Value range:
Address
selection of the base I/O address
03BChex, 0378hex, 0278hex
4.4.4 Dialog mode
When selecting the LPT I/O driver in the Test -> Set device... then the referring dialog comes up:
1026.6819.42
4-6
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Device Drivers
The dialog consists of two areas, one for reading the input lines and one for setting the output lines.
The numbers refer to the hardware pins of the parallel port.
Display:
Function:
current states of the inputs
Display of the input line states. The state of each line is represented by ist colour.
Button:
Function:
Read
Reads and displays the the states of all input lines
Parameter:
Function:
Monitoring Pin
Selects the input line to be read (redundant functionality).
Display:
Function:
current states of the outputs
Display of the output line states. The state of each line is represented by ist colour.
Parameter:
Function:
Pin
Selects the output line to be switched.
Parameter:
Function:
Value range:
State
Selects the state of the line selected with Pin.
ON, OFF
Button:
Function:
Switch
Switches the selected line to the selected state and updates the display of the output
lines.
1026.6819.42
4-7
E-8
Standard Device Drivers
ES-K1
4.4.5 Script Commands
Syntax of the script commands:
INTEGER get_device (STRING device, INTEGER cmnd, VOID param,
VAR INTEGER device_err_no, VAR STRING device_err_txt)
INTEGER set_device (STRING device, INTEGER cmnd, VOID param,
VAR INTEGER device_err_no, VAR STRING device_err_txt)
Parameter:
Data type:
Transfer:
description of the operation
description of the data type of the referring data
Internal means, the data will be transferred to or from the software driver only.
External means, the command directly affects the device.
The information about the state of a pin ("high" or "low") is done by a character "S" (Set) or "R" (Reset)
in the data string of the script function call.
ICS_OUT
Usage:
Parameter:
get_device, set_device
set_device:
state of a single output line to be switched
get_device:
state of a single output line (selected by ICS_INDEX)
Data type:
STRING
Transfer:
external
Note: set_device:
"S16" means pin 16 will be set (to "high")
get_device:
gives the state of a single output line (selected by ICS_INDEX)
syntax: e.g. "S12", "R1".
ICS_IN
Usage:
Parameter:
Data type:
Transfer:
Note:
get_device
state of a single input line (selected by ICS_INDEX)
STRING
external
syntax z.B. "S10", "R15".
Usage:
Parameter:
Data type:
Transfer:
Note:
get_device, set_device
pin index
INTEGER
internal
value range 1, ..., 17.
ICS_INDEX
1026.6819.42
4-8
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Device Drivers
4.5 Relay Matrix TS-RSP
he TS-RSP device driver provides the functionality required for controlling the relays in the RF Relay
Switch Matrix TS-RSP produced by Rohde & Schwarz. The device is controlled via the IEEE bus
interface.
All functions can be performed in two different modes:
·
Physical Mode:
All settings are transferred to the relay switch matrix.
·
Virtual Mode:
The operation of the device is software simulated. The switch matrix is not addressed.
The device driver provides the following dialog boxes:
·
·
Device Operation Dialog,
Properties Dialog.
The TS-RSP device driver may also be controlled by a script.
4.5.1 Device
The TS-RSP is controlled via IEEE bus interface. It consists out of a main frame which contains an IEEE
bus controlled I/O interface. Using this interface allows the control of RF relays which are located on a
plug-in board. For making the RF relay switch matrix ready for flexible use in different systems, several
relay boards with different types of relays are available:
RSP-EMI
(EMI Test System, 6 koxial relays with 1 input and 2 outputs)
RSP-EMS
(EMS Test System, 11 Koaxial Relays with 1 input and 2 outputs,
RF power meter)
RSP-BRF
(RF Test System, 4 Koaxial Relays with 1 input and 6 outputs)
The following combinations the relay plug-in boards are possible:
RSP-EMI + RSP-BRF
RSP-EMS + RSP-BRF
4.5.2 Properties
Multiple use of the device driver under a variety of logical names is possible in the Device
Configuration dialog box.
After selecting the TS-RSP device in the Device Configuration Dialog and clicking the Properties...
button the Properties Dialog Box will appear.
The dialog window is separated into two areas. In the upper area all already defined paths with their
names, the used relay board and the corresponding relay settings are displayed in the field Paths.
These settings can be modified in the lower area of the dialog using the fields Relay Board and Relay
Settings.
First in the field Relay Board is selected, which relay board in the TS-RSP shall be addressed. After this
the used relays are activated and configured. Using this principle two independent paths (each using
different relays) can be switched without influencing each other. The path names are used via the
device dialog, via a script or via the super driver SUPER-RSU.
Description of the Elements:
1026.6819.42
4-9
E-8
Standard Device Drivers
ES-K1
List: Paths
List of paths which can be set at the TS-RSP. The path name, the used relay board and the
corresponding relay setting is displayed.
Parameter: Relay Board
Function:
Range:
Selection of the desired relay board in the TS-RSP main frame.
RSP-EMS, RSP-EMI, RSP-BRF.
Parameter: Relay Setting
Function:
In this field all available relays for the selected relay board are displayed (for RSP-EMS
and RSP-EMS this are two paths switches, for RSP-BRF this are four 6 path switches). For each relay
the user can select whether it should be switched for the current path and if yes, to which position it
should be set (NC = relay closed, NO = relay opened).
Range: dependent from the current selected relay board.
Parameter: Path
Function:
Input field for the path name.
Range: Maximum 20 characters.
Button: Insert
The settings in the edit fields are added to the Paths list in the upper dialog area. But before this move,
a check is made that the path does not exist already.
Button: Edit
The marked path settings are moved to the edit fields path, relay board and relay setting. A double
click on the desired settings has the same effect.
Button: Modify
The modified settings are moved to the Paths list in the upper area of the dialog window. But first, a
check is made, that the path is not available double:
Button: Delete
A marked path in the Paths list is deleted.
Buttond: Clear
All relays in the field relay setting are set to the not selected state. Additionally the edit field Path is
cleared.
Button: OK
The dialog box is closed after the settings have been saved.
Button: Cancel
The dialog box is closed without the settings being saved.
4.5.3 Operating Dialog
1026.6819.42
4-10
E-8
ES-K1
Standard Device Drivers
When selecting the RSU device driver from the menu Test >> Set Device the Device Operation Dialog
Box will appear.
The paths of the TS-RSP are to be switched here. When a path is switched a corresponding IEEE bus
command is sent to the TS-RSP device. Several commands can be sent at the same time if they don't
collide.
The settings are made in script mode with the commands set_device(...) and get_device(...). A detailed
description of the commands will be found in 4.5.4 Overview of the Script Commands.
Description of the General Elements:
Button: OK
Saves the settings and closes the dialog box.
Button: Cancel
Closes the dialog box without saving the settings.
Display: Paths
List of all paths possible to switch at the TS-RSP device, defined in the Properties.
List: Selected Paths
Path to be switched. One of the paths the Paths list contains which is selected via the Select button.
Button: Select
The marked path is copied to the Selected Paths list. If the new path collides with any path available
already in this list, the old path is deleted from the list.
Button: Switch
Function:
Range:
Script command:
Switches the paths in the Selected Paths list.
All path names defined in the properties dialog box.
RSU_SETPATH
Type: STRING
Direct transfer to device.
Display: Relay State
In this field the current state of all relays available in the relay board are displayed.
4.5.4 Overview of the Script Commands
Script Command Syntax:
INTEGER get_device (STRING Device, INTEGER Command, VOID Data,
VAR INTEGER Device Error Code, VAR STRING Device Error Message)
INTEGER set_device (STRING Device, INTEGER Command, VOID Data,
VAR INTEGER Device Error Code, VAR STRING Device Error Message)
Parameter:
Data Type:
Transfer:
1026.6819.42
Description of the data to be transferred.
Identifies the type of data to be transferred.
Internal
Data is transferred to or from the device driver.
External
Command is sent directly to the device.
4-11
E-8
Standard Device Drivers
ES-K1
IDENT
Used in:
Parameter:
Data type:
Transfer:
PHYNAME
Used in:
Parameter:
Data type:
Transfer:
get_device
Device identification
STRING
Internal
get_device
Physical name of the device.
STRING
Internal
RSU_SETPATH
Can be used in:
set_device
Parameter:
Path to be switched at the TS-RSP.
Data type:
STRING
RSU_SETCOMMAND
Can be used in: set_device
Parameter:
Sends an IEEE bus command string to the TS-RSP.
Datentyp:
STRING
1026.6819.42
4-12
E-8
5 Dynamic Data Exchange
(DDE)
1026.6819.42
5-0
E-8
ES-K1
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
5.1 General
DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) enables to dynamically exchange data between two Windows
applications, provided both applications support the DDE functionality of Windows.
Applications that support DDE are MS WORD for WINDOWS as well as MS EXCEL, SUPERBASE,
SQL and WordPro and many others.
Different from data transfer via the clipboard, DDE represents a direct communication between two
applications. Therefore for DDE transfers both applications (ES-K1 as well as e.g. MS WORD) must
have been started from Windows.
The advantage of DDE over the clipboard is that data transfers can be automated. This way data
transfers and data updates can be done with minimum user effort.
One of the two applications, the so called "client" (e.g. MS WORD) controls the communication. The
other application (ES-K1) works as the "server", which on request delivers data to the client application.
The ES-K1 transfers these data as pure text, except the graphics which will be delivered in a vector
format.
Note: Office XP does not support DDE any more!
5.1.1 DDE Commands
Generally a DDE command consists of three parts:
Syntax: Service Name Topic Name Item Name
The preparation of a DDE transfer is done via the client application through providing of the server
application name (ES-K1 in this case), the topic name and the item name. The kind of available data
depends on the server application (see chapter 5.3)
The exact Syntax of DDE commands depends on the client application. A detailed description of the
command syntax for MS WORD follows.
5.2 DDE with MS WORD for Windows™
DDE enables to use all the presentation functionality in MS WORD for the creation of user defined test
reports based on data from the application ES-K1. The automation of this process can be achieved
through design of suitable document templates (also see chapter 5.2.2). The WORD ducument then
works as the client which controls the transfers.
5.2.1 General Command Syntax with WORD for Windows™
The buildup of a DDE connection from MS WORD is done by making use of the field functions "DDE"
and "DDEAuto".
Syntax: {DDE Service Topic Item}
{DDEAuto Service Topic Item}
DDE, DDEAuto:
WORD field function for dynamic data transfer
Service :
The service name. Here the name ES-K1 has to be given.
Topic :
The topic name. Could be e.g. a file type.
Item:
The item name. Should be the name of the data to be transferred.
Example:
{DDE ES-K1 System Topics}
This command lists all topics that are available from the server application ES-K1.
The item name consists of the ES-K1 database name and - if necessary - a subitem name
which must be separated from the database name by a '$' character.
First an empty function field must be inserted by pressing STRG+F9. The cursor will be positioned
between the brackets that work as field indicators. Now a field function DDE or DDEAuto can be
entered, along with the required names. Pressing F9 updates the field. WORD then automatically
changes to the display of the field's result, provided that the global settings of the fields allow to do so.
The field function DDEAuto works different from DDE in that the data will be automatically updated, i.e.,
a change in the ES-K1 file immediately leads to a change in the WORD document.
1026.6819.42
5-1
E-8
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
ES-K1
5.2.2 Creating a Test Report
For creating a test report via DDE it is a good idea to make use of the powerful table and style functions
of MS WORD.
In a first step the layout of the report has to be designed in a WORD document or document template.
To do so, tables should be assigned to the topics.
In a second step the items and subitems have to be inserted into the rows and columns of the table.
The style of the function fields can be defined as with normal text. So any kind of style (character font
and size, etc.) can be used. The style will also be valid for the result of the field after updating. A
resulting graphical diagram can be modified like any other graphics in MS WORD.
1026.6819.42
5-2
E-8
ES-K1
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
Example:
{company logo as a bitmap}
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001$HDR_HEAD1"}
{DDE
ES-K1
"vol_0001$HDT_EUT"}
RPH
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001
$HDR_EUT"}
{DDE
ES-K1
"vol_0001$HDT_MANU"}
RPH
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001
$HDR_MANU"}
{DDE
ES-K1
"vol_0001$HDT_OP_COND"}
RPH
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001
$HDR_OP_COND"}
{DDE
ES-K1
"vol_0001$HDT_OPER"}
RPH
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001
$HDR_OPER"}
{DDE
ES-K1
RPH
"vol_0001$HDT_TEST_SPEC"}
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001
$HDR_TEST_SPEC"}
{DDE
ES-K1
"vol_0001$HDT_COM1"}
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "vol_0001
$HDR_COM1"}
RPH
Comment:
If the device under test is used in the operating mode then the supply lines have to fulfill
the regulation ABC123 ...
Start
{DDE
ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_S
TART_F
REQ$S
1"}
Stop
{DDE
ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_S
TOP_F
REQ$S
1"}
Step
{DDE
ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_S
TEP_FR
EQ$S1"
}
IFBW
{DDE
ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_IF
BW$S1"
}
Detector
{DDE ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_DET_C
URVE1$S1"}
Meastime
{DDE ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_MEAS
TIME$S1"}
RF-ATTN
{DDE ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_RF_AT
TN$S1"}
Preampl.
{DDE ES-K1
SCT
"EN
55022
Voltage
fin$S_PREA
MP$S1"}
{DDE ES-K1 GRC "vol_0001"}
Measurement Results (QP Detector)
Frequency
{DDE
ES-K1
MES
"vol_0001_fin$R1
C1:R99C1"}
Level
{DDE ESK1
MES
"vol_0001_
fin$R1C2:
R99C2"}
Limit
{DDE ESK1
MES
"vol_0001_
fin$R1C3:
R99C3"}
Margin
{DDE
ES-K1
MES
"vol_0001_fin$R1
C4:R99C4"}
Exceed
{DDE ESK1
MES
"vol_0001_
fin$R1C5:
R99C5"}
Line
{DDE ESK1
MES
"vol_0001_
fin$R1C6:
R99C6"}
PE
{DDE ESK1
MES
"vol_0001_
fin$R1C7:
R99C7"}
Result:
With updating of the marked function fields the style settings will be used for the resulting
elements.Graphics will always be inserted with minimum size (can be streched to desired
size). Graphics can then be modified like any other graphics imported e.g. with the
clipboard.
A result of the final example report is shown on the following pages.
1026.6819.42
5-3
E-8
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
ES-K1
TEST
EUT
Manufacturer
Operating Condition
Operator
Test Specification
Comment
Comment:
Start
150.0
kHz
E.u.T.
Donald Duck
If the device under test is used in the operating mode then the supply lines have to fulfill
the regulation ABC123 ...
Stop
30.0
MHz
Step
6.0 kHz
IFBW
10 kHz
Detector
MaxPeak
Meastime
10.0 ms
RF-ATTN
0 dB
Preampl.
Off
Level [dBµV]
80
75
+
70
x
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
150k
300k
500k
1M
2M
3M
Frequency [Hz]
4M 5M
7M
10M
30M
x x MESvol_0001_fin QP
+ + MESvol_0001_fin AV
MESvol_0001_pre PK
MESvol_0001_pre AV
LIMEN 55022 V QP
LIMEN 55022 V AV
1026.6819.42
5-4
E-8
ES-K1
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
Measurement Results (QP Detector)
Frequency
9.978000
Level
67.79
Limit
60.00
Margin
-7.79
Exceed
*
Line
L3
PE
FLO
Margin
-23.49
Exceed
*
Line
L2
PE
FLO
Measurement Results (AV Detector)
Frequency
10.008000
1026.6819.42
Level
73.49
Limit
50.00
5-5
E-8
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
ES-K1
5.3 DDE Commands of the Application ES-K1
5.3.1 ES-K1 DDE Topics
The following topics are available:
System general state of the system
MES measurement result
LIM
limit line
XTP
probe transducer
XTS
system transducer
GRC graphics configuration
FRL
frequency list
RPH report header
RPC report configuration
SCT
scan table
SWT sweep table
Note:
The use of database names or codes for table elements works case sensitive. If a
database name holds spaces then the whole item name has to be put between " "
characters.
5.3.1.1 General State of the System
If the topic System is used then the DDE connection does not refer to a specific file. It can be used to
get general information on the data in the ES-K1.
Topic name:
SYSTEM
The following items can be retrieved:
Topics
lists all available topics in the format <name><tab>
SysItems
lists all available items to the current topic in the format <name><tab>
Formats
lists all available data formats in the format <name><tab>
Example with MS WORD:
{DDE ES-K1 System Formats}
1026.6819.42
5-6
E-8
ES-K1
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
5.3.1.2 Lists
Topic name:
MES
(measurement results)
Topic name:
LIM
(limit line)
Topic name:
XTP
(probe transducer)
Topic name:
XTS
(system transducer)
Topic name:
FRL
(frequency list)
The following items can be retrieved:
SysItems
lists all available items to the current topic in the format <name><tab>
FileType
gives the description of the data type
FileNames
gives a list of database names, separated through tabs
SubItems
lists all available subitems (commands after <database name>$) in the format
<subitem name><tab>
Database name If no subitem is given after the database name then the whole table will be
transferred in the following format:
<text line 1><CR><LF>
<text line 2><CR><LF>
<text line 3><CR><LF>
<text line 4><CR><LF>
<value lines 1...n><CR><LF>
<CR><LF><CR><LF>
<Tab><additional data elements 1...n><CR><LF>
The item name consists of an ES-K1 database name and optionally of a subitem name, separated
through a '$' character. No spaces are allowed between database name and subitem name.
The following subitems can be retrieved:
Name
delivers the name of the database element
Time
delivers the time (last modification) of the database element
Date
delivers the date (last modification) of the database element
TabSize
delivers the size of the table in the format
RrCc<tab>Ss
r
number of rows (including text lines)
c
number of columns
s
number of additional (single) values
R[H]r1Cc1:RrnCcn
delivers a rectangular portion from the table, rows r1 to rn, columns c1 to cn; the
columns are separated by <tab>, the rows by <tab><linefeed>
with R only the values will be transferred; no text lines will appear
with RH the four text lines (description, units, etc.) come before the values
Ss1:Ssn
delivers additional single values in the format
<tab><description><CR><LF>.
s2 delivers the name of the range table (scan/sweep table) in measurement results
Example with MS WORD:
{DDE ES-K1 MES "Example Result$RH1C1:R8C2"}
1026.6819.42
5-7
E-8
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
ES-K1
5.3.1.3 Graphics Configuration
Topic name:
GRC
The following items can be retrieved:
SysItems
lists all available items to the current topic in the format <name><tab>
FileType
gives the description of the data type
FileNames
gives a list of database names, separated through tabs
SubItems
lists all available subitems (commands after <database name>$) in the format
<subitem name><tab>
Database name If no subitem is given after the database name then the whole graphics will be
transferred in a vector format.
The item name consists of an ES-K1 database name and optionally of a subitem name, separated
through a '$' character. No spaces are allowed between database name and subitem name.
The following subitems can be retrieved:
Name
delivers the name of the database element
Time
delivers the time (last modification) of the database element
Date
delivers the date (last modification) of the database element
Example with MS WORD:
{DDE ES-K1 GRC "Example Graphics"}
1026.6819.42
5-8
E-8
ES-K1
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
5.3.1.4 Report Header
Topic name:
RPH
The following items can be retrieved:
SysItems
lists all available items to the current topic in the format <name><tab>
FileType
gives the description of the data type
FileNames
gives a list of database names, separated through tabs
SubItems
lists all available subitems (commands after <database name>$) in the format
<subitem name><tab>
Database name If no subitem is given after the database name then the whole report header will be
transferred in the following format:
<subitem description>:<tab><subitem text>
<CR><LF>
The item name consists of an ES-K1 database name and optionally of a subitem name, separated
through a '$' character. No spaces are allowed between database name and subitem name.
With the subitems those with a name HDT... give the description of the referring element, those with a
name HDR... the text of the element.
The following subitems can be retrieved:
Name
delivers the name of the database element
Time
delivers the time (last modification) of the database element
Date
delivers the date (last modification) of the database element
HDR_HEAD1, HDT_HEAD1
1st top line
HDR_HEAD2, HDT_HEAD2
2nd top line
HDR_EUT, HDT_EUT
description of the E.u.T.
HDR_MANU, HDT_MANU
description of the manufacturer
HDR_OP_COND, HDT_OP_COND
description of the operating conditions
HDR_TEST_SITE, HDT_TEST_SITE
description of the test site
HDR_OPER, HDT_OPER
description of the operator
HDR_TEST_SPEC, HDT_TEST_SPEC
description of the test specification
HDR_COM1, HDT_COM1
1st comment line
HDR_COM2, HDT_COM2
2nd comment line
Example with MS WORD:
{DDE ES-K1 RPH "Example Header$HDT_HEAD1"}
1026.6819.42
5-9
E-8
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
ES-K1
5.3.1.5 Report Configuration
Topic name:
RPC
The following items can be retrieved:
SysItems
lists all available items to the current topic in the format <name><tab>
FileType
gives the description of the data type
FileNames
gives a list of database names, separated through tabs
SubItems
lists all available subitems (commands after <database name>$) in the format
<subitem name><tab>
Database name If no subitem is given after the database name then the whole report configuration
will be transferred in the following format:
<subitem description>:
<tab><subitem text1>
<tab>...
<tab><subitem-textn>
<CR><LF>
The item name consists of an ES-K1 database name and optionally of a subitem name, separated
through a '$' character. No spaces are allowed between database name and subitem name.
The following subitems can be retrieved:
Name
delivers the name of the database element
Time
delivers the time (last modification) of the database element
Date
delivers the date (last modification) of the database element
RPH
delivers the database name of the report header that belongs to this report
configuration
LIM
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the limit lines that
belong to this report configuration
MES
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the measurement
results that belong to this report configuration
SCT
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the scan tables that
belong to this report configuration
SWT
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the sweep tables
that belong to this report configuration
XTS
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the system
transducers that belong to this report configuration
XTP
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the probe
transducers that belong to this report configuration
GRC
delivers a list holding the database names (separated by tabs) of the graphics
configurations that belong to this report configuration
REP_FOOTNOTE delivers the setting of the report footnote that belongs to this report configuration
REP_FTNOTETXT
delivers the report footnote text that belongs to this report configuration
REP_PICTURE
delivers the setting of the graphics output (full or half)
Example with MS WORD:
{DDE ES-K1 RPC "Example Report"}
1026.6819.42
5-10
E-8
ES-K1
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
5.3.1.6 Scan/Sweep Table
Topic name:
SCT
(scan table)
Topic name:
SWT (sweep table)
The following items can be retrieved:
SysItems
lists all available items to the current topic in the format <name><tab>
FileType
gives the description of the data type
FileNames
gives a list of database names, separated through tabs
SubItems
lists all available subitems (commands after <database name>$) in the format
<subitem name><tab>
Database name If no subitem is given after the database name then the whole table will be
transferred in the following format:
Ss:<subitem description>: <tab><subitem text>
<CR><LF>
s: number of the range; range 0 is used for elements that are not dependent on
the ranges
The item name consists of an ES-K1 database name and optionally of a subitem name, separated
through a '$' character. No spaces are allowed between database name and subitem name.
To retrieve the single values of a scan/sweep table the subitem name will be extended through a
subrange description, separated through a '$' character.
A subrange can be defined either through an index or through the frequency:
Ss selection of the subrange through an index
s
index
Ff selection of the subrange through a frequency
f
frequency in Hz.
Kf frequency in kHz.
Mf frequency in.MHz.
Gf frequency in.GHz.
A subrange with index 0 is used for elements that are not dependent on the subranges. If the surange
information is not given although the value of the item depends on the subrange, then an item will be
transferred for all subranges. Single elements are transferred in the following format:
<tab><subitem value>
In all other cases the format is as follows:
Ss:<subitem description>:<tab><subitem value><CR><LF>
The following subitems can be retrieved:
Name
delivers the name of the database element
Time
delivers the time (last modification) of the database element
Date
delivers the date (last modification) of the database element
ALL<s>
delivers all elements of a subrange in the following format:
Ss: <subitem description>:<tab><subitem value>
<CR><LF>.
Subitems that are valid for all subranges:
S_COUNT_SUB delivers the number of subranges
Example with MS WORD:
{DDE ES-K1 SCT "Example Scan Table$ALL$S1"}
delivers all elements of the 1st subrange
{DDE ES-K1 SCT " Example Scan Table $S_UNIT"}
delivers the level unit of the scan table
{DDE ES-K1 SCT " Example Scan Table $S_START_FREQ"}
delivers the start frequency for each of the subranges
{DDE ES-K1 SCT " Example Scan Table $S_START_FREQ$S2"}
delivers the start frequency of the 2nd subrange
1026.6819.42
5-11
E-8
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising